Items to be bid in this package:
Item #1 - Mechanical
Item #2 Plumbing
Item #3 - Automatic Fire Protection
For further information, see the Invitation to Bid and the Summary Of Work in Section 01110.
PROJECT MANUAL BOULDER COUNTY SHERIFF'S HEADQUARTERS REMODEL 5600 Flatiron Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301 MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, & AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION BID County Bid # 5277-10 Bid Date: Thursday, April 8, 2010, 2:00 p.m. PROJECT LOCATION & CONTACTS For: SHERIFF'S HEADQUARTERS REMODEL
Located at: 5600 Flatiron Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301
OWNER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Boulder County JVA, Inc. P.O. Box 471 1319 Spruce Street Boulder, CO. 80306 Boulder, CO 80302 303-441-3286 303-444-1951 Contact: Dave Houdeshell email: [email protected]
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR MECHANICAL ENGINEER Boulder County Administrative Services MKK Consulting Engineers Architect Division 7600 E. Orchard Rd., Ste. 250S P.O. Box 471 Greenwood Village, CO 80111 Boulder, CO 80306 303-796-6055 303-994-8682 cell 303-441 - 3944 Contact: Jean Petkovsek Contact: Dave Simmons Fax 303-796-6099 Email: dsimmons©bouldercounty.org email: [email protected]
ARCHITECT ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Boulder County Administrative Services MKK Consulting Engineers Architect Division 7600 E. Orchard Rd., Ste. 250S P.O. Box 471 Greenwood Village, CO 80111 Boulder, CO 80306 303-796-6055 303-441-3286 Contact: Jean Petkovsek Contact: Alan Watkins email: petkovsekmkkenq.com Email: awatkinsbouldercounty.org
GENERAL CONTRACTOR LIGHTING CONSULTANT Boulder County Administrative Services Clanton & Associates Inc Architect Division 4699 Nautilus Ct South Suite 102 P.O. Box 471 Boulder, CO 80301 Boulder, CO 80306 303-530-7229 303-434-4835 Contact: David Roederer Contact: Dave Hershman [email protected] Email: djhershmanbouldercounty.org
ELECTRICIAN CIVIL ENGINEER Boulder County Administrative Services Drexel Barrell th Architect Division 180038 Street Contact: Bart Tennant Boulder, CO 80301 303-434-4829 btennantbouldercounty.org Contact: Jim Brzostowicz Contact: Martin Marino 303-442-4338 303-434-4834 mmarinobouldercounty.org Jbrzostowicz@drexel barrel l. Project Manual Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel / Mechanical, Plumbing, Automatic Fire Protection HVAC Bid #5277-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0- BIDDING DOCUMENTS, CONTRACT, & GENERAL CONDITIONS 00020 - Invitation to Bid ...... Al - A2 00100 - Instructions to Bidders ...... B 1 to B6 00300- Bid Form ...... Cl to C3 A305 - A.I.A. Contractor's Qualification Statement (Sample) ...... 1 to 6 00500 - Sample Building Construction Contract ...... Dl to D12 00700 - General Conditions ...... El to ElO
DIVISION 1- PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 011lO Summary of Work ...... 01110-1-2 01300 Administrative Requirements ...... 01300-1-2 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls ...... 01500-1 01600 - Product Requirements ...... 01600-1-2 01700 - Execution requirements & Closeout Procedures ...... 01700-1-3
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING SPECIFICATION
DIVISION 22 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
Fire Protection Specifications are on the drawings
Note: The drawings listed below do not represent the entire construction drawing set. Only these drawings were deemed relevant for this bid. Please contact County Representative to request any drawings not included here.
TITLE SHEET, LEGEND, VICINITY MAP ...... A0 SITE PLAN, LANDSCAPING, DEMOLITION ...... Al FIRSTFLOOR PLAN ...... A2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN...... A3 ROOFPLAN...... A4 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ...... AS SECOND FLOOR REFELECTED CEILING PLAN ...... A6
MECHANICAL COVER SHEET ...... MP.0 15T FLOOR MECHANICAL DEMOLTION ...... DM.1 2ND FLOOR MECHANICAL DEMOLTION ...... DM.2 ROOF MECHANICAL DEMOLTION ...... DM.3
(continued on next page) TC-1 1ST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN ...... M1.1 2ND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN ...... M1.2 1ST FLOOR PIPING PLAN ...... M2.1 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN ...... M2.2 ROOF MECHANICAL PLAN ...... M3 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES ...... M4. I MECHANICAL SCHEDULES ...... M4.2 MECHANICAL DETAILS ...... M5 MECHANICAL SCHEMATICS ...... M6 MECHANICAL CONTROLS ...... M7 MECHANICAL CONTROLS ...... M8 MECHANICAL CONTROLS ...... M9 MECHANICAL CONTROLS ...... M1O
1ST FLOOR PLUMBING DEMOLTION ...... DPI 2ND FLOOR PLUMBING DEMOLTION ...... DP2
1ST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN ...... P1 2ND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN ...... P2 ROOF PLUMBING PLAN ...... P3 PLUMBING DETAILS & SCHEDULES ...... P4 PLUMBING ISOMETRICS ...... P5
FIRE PROTECTION PLAN ...... FP1
Note: Automatic Fire Protection Bid Set has architectural drawings and FP 1 only.
TC-2 INVITATION TO BID
Notice is hereby given that Boulder County will accept sealed bids for subcontracts for the Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel, 5600 Flatiron Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301.
PLEASE NOTE: The Boulder County Architect/Construction Division will be the General Contractor for this project. Contracts to be bid at this time include only those listed below.
The following items will be bid according to the project plans and specifications: Item #1 - Mechanical Item #2 Plumbing Item #3 - Automatic Fire Protection
Plans and project manuals will be available on Thursday, March 25 2010 at 10:00 a.m. at the Purchasing Department in the Boulder County Courthouse West Wing (First Floor), 2020 13th Street, or please call 303-441-3525 to make alternate arrangements. You may also view the bid documents on line at Rocky Mountain Bid Net at the web link below: https://www. govh I ds.corn/scripts/CO I/Public/homel.asp
A pre-bid walk-through will be held Wednesday, March 31, 2010 at 10:00 a.m. at the project site. The site is located at 5600 Flatiron Parkway, Boulder, CO 80301. Bidders are to meet the County Representative inside the main entrance on the first floor. The pre-bid conference is not mandatory, but bidders are strongly encouraged to attend. It is the bidder's responsibility to be familiar with all pre-existing conditions that may affect their bid.
Bids for contracts for the Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel must be received at the Purchasing Department Office prior to the due date and time, for date and time stamping. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope marked: Bid # 5277-10, Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel - Item # BIDDERS SHOULD USE THE BID FORM IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.
1. Questions concerning bidding procedures are to be brought to the Purchasing Department at the number listed above.
2. Questions concerning Technical Issues will be dealt with by the COUNTY'S REPRESENTATIVE, Alan Watkins, Boulder County Architect's Office, 2020 13th St., Boulder, CO 80302, ph. 303-441-3286 (fax: 303-441-1718). [email protected]
Submittal Due: Date: Thursday, April 8, 2010 Time: 2:00 P.M. At: Boulder County Purchasing Office 2020 13th Street Boulder, Colorado 80302
UT
4. Late Bids are those with a date and time stamp from the Boulder County Purchasing Office after the due date and time. They will be returned unopened.
Bid Opening will occur at the time bids are due or as soon as practical after the due time. All bids will be read aloud in the Boulder County Purchasing Office.
6. Evaluation of Contractor's Qualification Statement (A.I.A. Form A305) will be based on the following criteria:
a. Information on A.I.A. A305 must be current to within 30 days of submittal.
b. The Contractor shall have been in business for at least five (5) years and shall have completed at least four remodel projects of similar size in existing buildings that were occupied or partially occupied during construction.
C. A completed qualification statement may be required for a bid to be recommended to the Commissioners.
7. Final Acceptance of bids is up to the Board of County Commissioners. The Board of County Commissioners reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive any informalities therein, and to accept the bid that in the opinion of the Board of County Commissioners is in the best interest of the Board and the County of Boulder, State of Colorado.
8. All items under the Instructions to Bidders shall be binding on all Bidders.
If you need special services provided for under the Americans with Disabilities Act, contact Peggy Jackson, ADA Coordinator, or the Human Resources office at 303-441-3508 at least 48 hours before the scheduled event.
A2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
To be considered, bids must be made in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders.
ARTICLE 1 - Definitions
1.1 Bidding Documents include the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, Contractor's Qualification Statement, other sample bidding and contract forms and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids, the plans, specifications and special provisions.
1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.
1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect or Owner prior to the Bid Opening, which modify or interpret the bidding documents by addition, deletion, clarification or correction.
1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein supported by data called for by the Bidding Documents.
1.5 Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described as the base, to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
1.6 An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bidding Documents is accepted.
1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Contract Documents.
1.8 A Bidder is one who submits a Bid for Contract for the Work described in the proposed Contract documents and is referred to throughout these instructions as if singular in number and masculine in gender.
1.9 A Sub-Bidder is one who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE B-2
ARTICLE 2 - Bidder's Representation
2.1 Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that:
a. He has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his Bid is made in accordance therewith. b. He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed. C. His Bid is based upon the materials, system and equipment described in the Bidding Documents without exceptions.
ARTICLE 3 - Bidding Documents
3.1 Copies a. Bidding Documents can be picked up at the locations designated in the Invitation to Bid. b. Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; the County and Architect assume no responsibility for errors or misinterpretations of Bidding Documents. C. The County and Architect, in making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above items, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant for any other use.
3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents a. Bidders shall promptly notify the County Representative listed in the Invitation to Bid of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions. b. Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request to the County's Representative received at least seven (7) days prior to the date of receipt of Bids. C. Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidder shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. The County's Representative will not be responsible for oral clarification.
3.3 Substitutions a. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. It is not the intention of the Contract Documents to exclude materials equal to those specified. b. Substitution will not be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the Bidder and has been received by the County's Representative at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 in the Project Manual. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE B-3
3.4 Addenda a. All who are known by the County's Representative to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents will be notified when each addendum is issued. b. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than three (3) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an addendum, if necessary, postponing the date for receipt of Bids or withdrawing the request for Bids. d. Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to ensure receipt of all addenda. e. All addenda issued shall become a part of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 - Bidding Procedure
4.1 Form and Style of Bids Failure to comply with the following provisions may be cause for rejection of Bids. a. All blanks on the Bid Forms shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. Illegible Bids will be cause for rejection. b. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the words shall govern. C. Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. d. All requested alternates shall be bid. If a Bidder wishes not to bid an alternate, it shall be marked "NO BID". e. Where there are two or more major items of work for which separate quotations have been requested, Bidder may state his refusal to accept less than whatever combination of the items he stipulates. f. Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify his bid in any other manner. g. Each copy of Bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and a statement whether Bidder is a Sole proprietor, a Partnership, a Corporation or any other legal entity, and each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a Corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current Power of Attorney attached certifying agent's authorityo bind Bidder.
4.2 Collusive Agreements Each Bidder submitting a Bid to the County for any portion of the work contemplated by the documents on which bidding is based may be required to execute an affidavit to the effect that he has not entered into a collusive agreement with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any Bid submitted. 4.3 Submission of Bids
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE B-4
a. Bids are to be submitted to the location designated in the Invitation to Bid on a form following the requirement of Article 4.1 of these Instructions to Bidders. b. No bid received after the time and date designated in the Invitation to Bid or the latest time and date published in any of the Addenda will be considered. C. Oral, telephonic, facsimile (fax), telegraphic, or e-mail Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration.
4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid Prior to Opening a. Before the bids are opened, bidders will be asked if there are any present who wish to withdraw their bid. A bidder may then withdraw from bidding if s/he wishes. Bidders will them be asked if there are any present who wish to modify their bid only with respect to signing a forgotten document or correcting similar clerical errors and will be informed that they may then do so. Bidders may not use this time to complete a bid, make an outside call to a subcontractor, or any other similar change. A bidder wishing to modify a bid shall state the nature of the modification (correction of mathematical error, etc.) before being allowed to open the envelope and make such modification. Bids turned back to the bidder for modification will not be allowed to be removed from the location of the bid opening. b. For the thirty (30) days after the actual opening of Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
ARTICLE 5 - Consideration of Bids
5.1 Rejection of Bids a. The County shall have the right to reject any or all Bids and in particular to reject a Bid not accompanied by any required bid security or data required by the Bidding Documents or a Bid in any way incomplete or irregular. b. The County may reject a Bid before or after bid opening, upon receiving and reviewing evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder.
5.2 Acceptance of Bid (Award) a. The County shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. b. It is the intent of the County to award a Contract to the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents, is judged to be reasonable, and does not exceed the funds available. C. Notwithstanding any delay in the preparation and execution of the formal Contract Agreement, each Bidder shall be prepared, upon written notice of Bid Award, to furnish all required bonds and to commence work within ten (10) days following receipt of such written Notice of Award and Order to Proceed, unless otherwise
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE B-5
specified.
ARTICLE 6 - Qualification of Contractors and Subcontractors
6.1 Contractor's Qualifications a. Successful bidders will submit all the information required by the AlA Document A305 and these Instructions. b. The evaluation committee shall make its decision based on the criteria listed in the Invitation to Bid. C. In addition the Contractor will submit: 1. A list of the work to be performed by the Bidder with his own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers of principal items or systems of material and equipment proposed for the Work. 3. A list of names of Subcontractors or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for all except minor portions of the Work shall be submitted to County within five (5) days after bid award. d. The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the County the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors to furnish and perform the Work described in the Sections of the Specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractors' respective trades.
6.2 Rejection of Subcontractors: Prior to the Award of the Contract, the County will notify the Bidder in writing if the County, after due investigation, has reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list. If the County has a reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses in writing to accept such person or organization, the Bidder may, at his option, (1) withdraw his Bid, (2) submit an acceptable substitute Subcontractor with an increase in his bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The County may, at its discretion, accept the increased bid price or it may disqualify the Bidder.
6.3 Use of Accepted Subcontractors: Subcontractors and other persons and organizations proposed by the Bidder and accepted by the County must be used on the work for which they were proposed and accepted and shall not be changed except with the written approval of the County.
ARTICLE 7- Sales Tax
7.1 Attention of Bidders is particularly called to the requirement for certificates of State Tax exemption for the Contractors and Subcontractors upon award of Contract. (Title 39-26- 114, 1973, CRS as amended). DO NOT INCLUDE SALES TAX IN THE BID
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE B-6
PROPOSAL. Questiois regarding this provision should be referred to the Colorado State Department of Revenue, Sales Tax Division.
7.2 Where applicable, the Contractor must file for applicable permits under the County's General Building Permit. Contractors not filing under the County's permit will be responsible for applicable taxes at no additional cost to the County.
ARTICLE 8 - Time of Completion
8.1 The Bidder shall insert the number of calendar days to complete the Project, start date, and/or finish date as requested in the Bid form. Refer to Invitation to Bid for intended project dates.
ARTICLE 9 Bonding Requirements
9.1 Performance Bonds and Labor/Material Payment Bonds are required if the total contract amount is in excess of Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000). For further information and requirements see the General Conditions
ARTICLE 10 - Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor
10.1 The Agreement for the Work will be written on the Boulder County Building Construction Contract where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, as provided for in the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 11 - Licenses and Permits
11.1 Contractor and subcontractor shall be licensed if required by State, City or other local regulations to perform the work intended..
ARTICLE 12 -RETURN PLANS AND PROJECT MANUALS to:
12.1 Boulder County Administrative Services Department 2020 13th Street (S.E. corner of 13th & Spruce Streets) Boulder, Colorado 80302 or P.O. Box 471 Boulder, Colorado 80306 BID FORM FOR BOULDER COUNTY PROJECT: SHERIFF HEADQUARTERS REMODEL MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, & AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION BID #5277-10
TO: BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS BOULDER COUNTY BOULDER, COLORADO
Contractor has examined the Plans and Specifications and the site of the proposed work, and receipt of Addenda Nos. is hereby acknowledged.
Contractor agrees that the other parts of the Contract Documents shall form and be part of the Contract to be signed by him if this Bid is accepted.
Contractor hereby proposes to furnish all labor, machinery, equipment, materials and supplies, and to sustain all the expense incurred in doing the work hereinafter described for what is known as, SHERIFF HEADQUARTERS REMODEL / MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, & AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION, according to all Contract Documents of the County Commissioners, County of Boulder, of the State of Colorado, dated February 16, 2010 and March 19, 2010.
Contractor agrees to protect his employees on this contract, if awarded, by adequate Workmen's Compensation Insurance. The Contractor further agrees to provide evidence of Comprehensive General and Automobile Liability Insurance, as per the limits of the contract, prior to commencement of Work.
Contractor agrees that the price for any Extra Work or Materials that the County may order in writing is to be agreed upon, either as a lump sum or unit price, prior to commencing the Work or supplying the materials.
Contractor hereby agrees to execute a Contract on forms provided by the said County Representative within ten (10) days (or such further time as may be allowed in writing by the County Representative) after receiving notification of the Award of Contract based on this bid, and in case he does not, the County Commissioners may proceed to award the Contract to another, readvertise the work for bids, or proceed in any lawful manner they deem advisable.
Contractor agrees to commence the work within ten (10) days (or such further time as may be allowed in writing by the County) after the Contract has been signed and the Contractor has submitted to the County the Certificate of Insurance and all required Bonds. The Contractor also agrees to complete the work according to a mutually accepted schedule to be worked out with Boulder County.
Contractor hereby declares and stipulates that this Bid is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other Contractor, person or persons bidding for the same work.
C-i Contractor understands that the County reserves the right to make the award on the basis of the Bid deemed most favorable to the County, to waive any informalities, or to reject any or all Bids, but that this Bid shall remain open and not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days from the date prescribed for its opening.
Company Name
Type or Print name of Bidder's Authorized Officer or Partner
Signature of Bidder's Authorized Officer or Partner Date
NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, set forth the legal name of the corporation together with the signature of the officer or officers authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation. If Bidder is a partnership, set forth the name of the firm together with the signature of the partner or partners authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the partnership.
Business Address:
Telephone Number: Date of Bid:
ATTEST: Secretary (Corporate Seal)
Documents required to be submitted with this bid form are:
1. AlA Document A305, Contractors Qualification Statement (Unless you have filed one with us in the last 6 months.) Section 5 of the Contractor's Qualification Statement (Financial Statement) does not need to be submitted with the Bid, but must be submitted within 3 days after being requested by Boulder County.
2. Please submit two copies of this bid.
Incomplete bid packages maybe cause for rejection by Board of County Commissioners.
C-2 BID FORM Sheriff Headquarters I Remodel PAGE C-3
BID All work described in the Drawings, Specifications and Addenda for this project.
ITEM #1- MECHANICAL REMODEL
Base Design Price: dollars
($ ) Base Time: calendar days to complete all Work.
Controls Add Alternate #3 price: dollars
Alternate Design 1 Price: dollars ($ ) Base Time: calendar days to complete all Work. Controls Add Alternate #3 price: dollars
Alternate Design 2 Price: dollars ($ ) Base Time: calendar days to complete all Work. Controls Add Alternate #3 price: dollars
ITEM #2- PLUMBING REMODEL Base Price: dollars
Base Time: calendar days to complete all Work.
(continued on next page) BID FORM Sheriff Headquarters / Remodel PAGE C-4
ITEM #3 AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION REMODEL
Base Price: dollars
Base Time: calendar days to complete all Work.
Please include with this form any attachments needed for clarification of bid. I H E A M E R I C A N INSTITUTE OF A 1 C 11 I I F. C I S S
/IIA Docume,it A305 Contractor's Qualification Statement 1986 EDITION
71.7is form is approved and recommended by The American Institute of Architects (A IA) and The Aoiat ed (xeneral Contractors u/America (A G() for use in eralxiat ing the quab/ications 0/ conOaclors. No endorsement qf the .cii/,mittnz part V or ic'ri/icalion of the in/ormation t fli(4dC bj. the AlA Or AGC.
The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and suffi ciently complete so as not to be miIeading.
St 135111'i I) TO.
SIJJ3MIT1 EL) BY; Corporation U NAME: Partncrhip U] ADDRESS: Individual U]
PIlNCLPAl. OFFICL. joint Venture fl Otlwr :1
NAMh OF PRO ECT (if applicable):
TYPE OF WORK (file separate form for each Classification ot \Xork
Gcncral Ct 1itu. non * H\AC
PLumbing EIc( tri(.1I Other. (pkasc Specify)
>pvt tgli( V)6'),i 1969, I :1986 b The Amcdcmi 1twittav of Architects, I '' Ne tk At cml ic, N 'A.. 'A 1(111 ox;. 211ow, l(i'I);klttcIt)It ofthe nt.Ucri:il herein itt ci,ilt,tttitril (RHIIt110 ii its provisiolls ii ill tutt writ tell Itli I1)i.,*it Ft of ft A' is tLiFt' th_ ivrigitt hut of HIL, V;lilvO '.i.tte'. md will he '.tlpi'cf It; kiol prosecwimi,
AIADOCUMENT3OS 1.10K'.ti MIII 0','SRJI \1i:'.l 1986 l)Iiltl’u’ - MA' ' ;' tj e'.irt ti' tnt iu iii ut '., I t, ' w utu '.0 c,iu' tic .'runci 4305.1985 1
WARMING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. 1. ORGANIZATION 1A How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor?
1.2 How many years has your or8anization been in business under its present business name?
12, 1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated?
If your rgnlzation is a corporation, answer the foIIowii'g: L3 ; '], Date of icorporatiun 1.3.2. State of incorporation: 1.3.3 Prsiderit's nine: 1.3.4 Vice-.president's name(s):
1.3.5 Secretary's name: I. rreastirer's name: 1,4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following; 1,4.1 i)atc of organization 1.412 'l'ype of partnership (if applicable): 1.4.3 Naffle(s) of general partner(s):
1.5 11 your organization is individually owned, answer the following; 1.5.1 Date. of >rganization: 1.5 .2 Nwne of owner:
AlA DOCUMENT A46 0'jjtAc i at's Qt ALIVICKHON s'rvi't;,.w'i 1955 etnFR >s AIA ,\5llA e'I'l'n"l' a s r''t a's, 'u;' yc ats \'ENl 'I;, N u',. WAN lozrc z i .e, .s A305 .1986 2
WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. I .6 If the fbrm of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals;
2. LICENSING 2, 1 List jurisdictions and. trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable.
2,2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is fled.
3 EXPERIENCE 3 1 List the categories of Work that your organization normally performs with its own forces,
3.2 (htims and Suits. (If the answer to 111Y of the questions below is yes, please attach details.)
32.1 1 his your, organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it?
3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers?
3.2.3 1 [as your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to cOnstfuc tion o ntmcts within the last five years?
3.3 Within the histfive, years, has any officer or principal of yoUr organization ever been an officer or principal of another Organization when it failed to complete z Construction contract? (If th answer is yes, please attach details.)
AM DOCUMENT A305 ci NTiACTOlCs Qt’AOVJcNUON sIxrMENi’ 1980’ 9 )nION A1A <’,’1986. rite iettics INSTITI're or ,uoc rrecis, c New VOI1K veste, NW,, '.\s}iiioN. n.e. .WUI( A3051986 3
WARNING- Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright Jaws and Is subject to legal prosecution.
3.4 On'a cpatte sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name% of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion dare. 3,4, I State total worth of work in progress and under contract:
3.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your Organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. 3.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work perPrmed during the past five years:
3.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individ- uals of your organization.
4 REFERENCES 4.1 'I'rade References:
4,2 Bonk References:
4.3 Surety: 4.3.1 Name of bonding company:.
4.3.2 Name. and address of agent:
Atfr DOCUMENT A305 (x).rrRA(:roIes Q:AIJvIcA'i1os sr txr *1980 W)fi!o5 MA'S' I (c) 106 it{E . OIUCAN INTrrt'rt 9AacHrrx:rs. I'.% NEW YOUR AVEN(E, 5W,, WAS) IINGTON, O.C. 20000 A305.4986 4
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecutton. 5 FINANCING 5.1 Financial Statement. 5.1 .1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited including your organizations latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses);
Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.g. aCcounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, pro- vision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll tax" Other Liabilities (e.g,, capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings).
5,1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attahed financial statement, and date thereof
5.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one?
5.1 4 If not, CX1I;(iU the relationship and financial responsibility of th organizatiOn whose fina4dal statement is provided (e.g., parentsubsidiary).
5.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for coil' struc.'tion?
AlA DOCUMENT A3O cc ix A'f( )tts tsi.u'icxrn cx r,VIEMt.NT 0, Wli( ElxrR)5 \IA’ ri ilct .o c. sin t 'US 01' AMA IVMCm, 1 -,15 NFAV yosK Avrxt 5, sc.. vAsncNc ;ic IN. ftC. 2cccc6 A305-1986 5
WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 6 SIGNATURE 6,1 Dated at this day of 19
Name of c)rgaitiOfl.
6.2
M being duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided hrcin is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading.
Subscribed and sworn hefore me this dayof 19
NotaEy 1uhlic
My Commission Fxptres
CAUTION* You should sign an original AlA document which has this caution printed In red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced,
AlA DOCUMENT A305.* O5ntA( TOR. QI LtI 1CM ION rMLMLM 190 FOIFION MA U AlLIlCAN IN"TI 11 OF \R(.1 UI it IS, ' NI ' ' (IRK AVENUE, S ' . '5 ILllsC ron. I) I' URII)( A305 4986 6
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. BOULDER COUNTY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT - SAMPLE SHERIFF HEADQUARTERS REMODEL MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, & AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION BID NO. 5277-10
THIS CONTRACT dated (the Date Of Award), this ____ day of,2010, is between the Board of County Commissioners of the County of Boulder, Colorado, hereinafter referred to as the "County", and , hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, and shall inure to the benefit of, and be binding upon, the successors of these parties.
The County and the Contractor agree as follows:
1. Work. The Contractor will furnish all the work, labor, and materials and perform all the work required for the complete and prompt execution of Boulder County project, SHERIFF HEADQUARTERS REMODEL, Item # , (Description), BID # 5277-10. The Contractor will perform in a good and workmanlike manner at its own cost and expense. Performance shall be strictly in accordance with all contract documents for this project, including the drawings and specifications. The Documents included and made part of this contract are:
a. The Contract Documents: the Drawings, the Bid Documents, and all of this Project Manual. b. Addenda to the Contract Documents C. All forms used to execute provisions of the Contract Documents; i.e., bond forms, certificates of insurance, stop work orders, change orders, certificates of payment, etc.
2. Compensation. The County will pay the Contractor dollars and cents, ($ _), and such further amounts as may be required as a result of additional work or change orders, pursuant to the provisions of the specifications and the general conditions.
3. Time. Time is of the essence in the performance of the work under this contract. Work shall begin as soon as possible and shall be completed within the schedule set by Boulder County, unless additional time is allowed by the County in writing under the provisions of the Contract Documents.
4. Bonds. Prior to the execution of this contract by the County, the Contractor shall furnish to the County all bonds required by law, by the Instructions to Bidders and by the General Conditions.
5. Equal Opportunities. The contractor agrees to comply with the letter and spirit of the Colorado AntiDiscrimination Act of 1957, C .R. S. 24-34-301, et M., as amended, and all applicable laws respecting discrimination and unfair employment practices.
D-1 CONTRACT Page D-2
6. Indemnification. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damages to persons or property which may in whole or in part be caused by the Contractor or its agents or employees, or which may result or arise in whole or in part from their performing services hereunder, and will indemnify and hold harmless the County, its elected and appointed officials, and its employees, agents and representatives, from any and all liability, damage, loss, cost or expense, including but not limited to attorneys' fees which the County, its elected or appointed officials, or its employees, agents or representatives may suffer as a result of any and all claims, demands, actions, costs or judgments made or brought against them by any person or entity, and which arise either in whole or in part out of the services performed under this Agreement. By demanding this right to indemnification, the County in no way waives or intends to waive the limitations on liability which are provided to the County and its employees under the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act, C.R.S. . 24-10-101 et as amended.
7. Insurance Requirements. The Contractor providing services under this Agreement will be required to procure and maintain at his own expense and without cost to Boulder County, until final acceptance of all work covered by the Contract, or proposal, the following types and amounts of insurance. The policy limits required are to be considered minimum amounts and may increase due to the scope of risk involved.
a. Commercial General Liability. This coverage should be provided on ISO Form CG2503 (1998 Edition) with minimum limits of $600,000 combined single limit for each occurrence. Coverage shall include products/completed operations liability.
b. Workers Compensation and Employers Liability. Workers' Compensation must be maintained in accordance with the statutory limits for every person utilized by the Contractor for work under this Contract. Employer's Liability is required for minimum limits of $100,000 Each Accident; $500,000 Disease-Policy Limit; $100,000 Disease-Each Employee.
Automobile Liability. Minimum limits are required to be $600,000 for each occurrence. Coverage must include: -All vehicles owned, non-owned, hired to be used on the contract -Personal Injury Protection where applicable
The Contractor shall provide Certificates of Insurance to Boulder County demonstrating that the aforementioned insurance requirements have been met prior to the commencement of work under this Contract. The Comprehensive General Liability Certificate of Insurance shall indicate Boulder County as an ADDITIONAL INSURED. CONTRACT Page D-3
1. The Additional Insured wording should be as follows: The County of Boulder, State of Colorado, a body corporate and politic is named as an additional insured.
2. These Certificates of Insurance shall also contain a valid provision or endorsement that these policies may not be cancelled, terminated, changed or modified, without thirty (30) days written notice to the County.
3. The above notices and Certificates of Insurance must be forwarded to the following designated County representative:
Pam Stonecipher, Risk Manager Boulder County P.O. Box 471 Boulder, Colorado 80306 303.441.3801 voice 303.441.4526 fax
The Contractor is responsible for ascertaining that its subcontractors are properly insured to meet the above requirements before permitting them to commence work under this Contract.
8. This Contract is subject to all statutory requirements applicable to political subdivisions of the State. Without limiting this statement, attention is drawn to the following:
a. Colorado Labor: Colorado labor shall be employed to perform the work to the extent of not less than eighty percent (80%) of each type or class of labor in the several classifications of skilled and common labor employed in the project, in accordance with Section 8-17-101, et seq., C.R.S. "Colorado Labor" means any person who is a resident of the State of Colorado, at the time of employment, without discrimination as to race, color, creed, sex, age, or religion except when sex or age is a bona fide occupational qualification.
b. Bribery or Abuse of Public Office: Contractor asserts that it is familiar with the provisions of Section 18-8-301, et seq., C.R.S. (Bribery and Corrupt Influences) and Section 18-8-401, et seq. C.R.S. (Abuse of Public Office) and that no violation of such provisions has occurred with regard to this contract.
C. Non-Payment to Sub-contractors: Contract Payments may be withheld pursuant to Section 38-26-107, C.R.S., if the County receives a verified statement that the Contractor has not paid amounts due to any person who has supplied labor or materials, for the project. CONTRACT Page D-4
9. Solicitations for Subcontractors, Including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations by the Contractor for any work related to this Contract to be performed under a subcontract, either by comprehensive bidding or negotiation, and including procurements of materials or equipment, the Contractor shall notify each potential subcontractor or supplier of the Contractor's obligations under this Contract, and of all pertinent regulations relative to nondiscrimination and unfair employment practices on the basis of race, color, national origin, handicap, or other unfair or discriminatory grounds.
10. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination and unfair employment practices provisions of this contract, the County shall impose such sanctions under the Contract as it may determine to be appropriate, including but not limited to:
a. Withholding of payments to the Contractor under the Contract until the Contractor complies, and/or
b. Cancellation, termination or suspension of the Contract, in whole or in part, effective upon seven (7) days written notice to the Contractor pursuant to paragraph 15 below.
11. Applicability to Subcontractors: The Contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs 8 through 13 of this contract in every subcontract which it enters for purposes of carrying out this Contract, including subcontracts for the procurement of materials or equipment. In addition, the Contractor, if directed by the County or other authorized governmental representatives as a means of enforcing such regulations, shall take whatever enforcement action the County or authorized governmental representative may require of the Contractor with respect to the affected subcontract or procurement, including imposition of the sanctions for noncompliance specified in paragraph 10 of this Contract, above; provided, however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation by a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such enforcement action, the Contractor may request that the County or other affected governmental entity join in such litigation to protect the interests of the County or other governmental entity.
12. Permits and Licenses: The Contractor shall have full responsibility for identifying and obtaining prior to the start of work under this Contract, and for maintaining throughout the term of this Contract, any governmental permits or licenses which may be requested in order to carry out the work.
13. Inspection of Work: The County representatives shall have the right to enter freely and inspect fully the work site to insure full compliance with this Contract and the Bidding Documents, so long as such inspection does not interfere unreasonably with the Contractor's prosecution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping a competent and reliable supervisor on the Work Site at all times during which work under this Contract is being performed. In the event the CONTRACT Page D-5
Contractor is absent from the Work Site, the superintendent shall stand in the place of the Contractor as his authorized representative and any notices or directions given by the County or its authorized representatives to the superintendent which are pertinent to this Contract shall be binding on the Contractor as if given to it.
14. Termination:
a. The provisions of paragraph 2 of this Contract notwithstanding, the County reserves the right to terminate work under this Contract if funds are not appropriated, budgeted, or otherwise made available for this Contract for any years subsequent to the current fiscal year. If the County terminates the, Contract for this reason, the County and the Contractor shall be released from all obligations to perform work and make payments hereunder, except that the County shall be required to make payment for work which has been performed by the Contractor prior to the effective date of termination under this provision; and, conversely, the Contractor shall be required to complete any work for which the County has made payment prior to the effective termination date. Termination by the County under this provision shall be effective seven (7) days after the County provides notice to the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 15, below.
b. If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the contract or Bid Documents, or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the County, effective after seven (7) days' written notice to the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 15, below, and without prejudice to any other remedy the County may have, may make good any resulting deficiencies in the work and may deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due to the Contractor; or, at its option, the County may terminate the Contract upon the notice required hereunder, and, if the County deems appropriate, may take possession of the Work Site and of all materials, tools, and construction equipment and machinery located thereon and owned by the Contractor, and may finish the work by whatever method it deems expedient. If the unpaid balance outstanding for any work which has been performed adequately by the Contractor, exceeds the expense to the County of finishing or remedying work under this provision, the County shall pay such excess to the Contractor, but if such expense, whatever its amount, if reasonable, exceeds such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the County, and shall be liable for any such excess which the Contractor or his surety is unable or unwilling to pay to the County.
C. The preceding provisions of this paragraph notwithstanding, performance of work under this Contract may be suspended or terminated, either in whole or in part, by the County, for any reason, whenever the County determines that such termination or suspension is in the best interests of the County. Such suspension or termination shall be effective after seven (7) days' written notice to the Contractor pursuant to the CONTRACT Page D-6
provisions of paragraph 15, below, unless a shorter effective period is specified pursuant to subparagraph d., below. The notice required for this purpose shall state the reasons for, and extent and duration of, such suspension or termination and the responsive action to be reasonably required by the County of the Contractor. Upon the effective date of such suspension or termination, the Contractor shall take the responsive action specified in the Notice, including, if the Notice so specifies, the cancellation or postponement of all outstanding commitments concerning the work. The Contractor shall be obligated to take any reasonably required responsive action as diligently and cost effectively as possible. The Contractor shall submit to the County a written claim for all outstanding amounts which the County owes the Contractor under the Contract, as soon as possible after the County exercises its right to take action under this provision
d. In the event of any emergency or urgent situation related to the work being performed under this Contract, the County, in its discretion, may shorten the effective notice periods specified in subparagraphs a. through c. above. If the County exercises this discretion it shall provide the required notice to the Contractor or his authorized representative by hand-delivery, and shall clearly specify in the notice the effective date of the suspension or termination.
C. In the event the County exercises any of the termination rights specified in subparagraphs a. through d. above, this Contract shall cease to be of any further force and effect, with the exception of all contract remedies which are specified herein and may otherwise be available to the parties under law, and with the exception of any rights or liabilities of these parties which may survive by virtue of paragraphs 6 through 14 of this Contract
15. Notices: For purposes of the notices required to be provided under paragraphs 10 and 14, above, all such notices shall be in writing, and shall be either sent by Certified US Mail, return receipt requested, or hand-delivered to the following representatives of the parties at the following addresses: For the County: Boulder County / Alan Watkins P.O. Box 471 Boulder, Colorado 80306 303-441-3286
For the Contractor: (Name and Address of Contractor) or, if hand-delivery is used, personally to the Contractor's superintendent at the Work Site pursuant to paragraph 14, above. In the event a notice is mailed (pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph), the seven (7) day effective time periods specified under paragraphs 7, 10 and 14, above, shall commence to run on the day after the postmarked date of mailing. CONTRACT Page D-7
16. Acceptance and Final Payment: Within ten days after the Contractor's declaration of completion of the work, the County will make a final inspection thereof to determine whether the work has been completed in accordance with the contract. If any list of deficiencies results from such final inspection, the Contractor shall promptly rectify all items appearing thereon, before final payment will be made. When the owner indicates acceptance of the work, the Contractor may requisition final payment, including retainage, on account of the purchase order contract price.
17. Guaranty and Warranties:
a. The Contractor shall promptly correct any Work rejected by the County as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and shall correct any Work found to be defective or nonconforming within a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion of the Contract or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Article apply to Work done by Subcontractors or Support Services as well as to Work done by direct employees of the Contractor. Corrections shall be made at no expense to the County.
b The Contractor shall furnish the County with all guarantees and warranties required under the specifications. Unless specifically stated in the specifications, such warranties and guarantees shall run from the date of installation, not from the date of purchase by the Contractor. Unless stated elsewhere in the Specifications, warranties and guarantees shall be for one (1) year.
18. Post-Completion: Final payment made to the Contractor on account of the work shall not operate to relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty material or workmanship, and unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall remedy any defect due thereto and pay for any damages resultant therefrom which shall appear within one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance of the work.
19. Benefit to Successors and Assigns: This Contract, during its term as specified herein, shall inure and benefit and shall be binding upon the successors, heirs, and assigns of the parties hereto.
20. Severability: Any provision of this contract which may be rendered null and void shall not invalidate the remainder of this Contract to the extent the Contract is capable of execution.
21. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Colorado and shall be effective upon execution by both parties. Any litigation between these parties involving this contract shall be pursued in the District Court in Boulder County, Colorado. CONTRACT Page D-8
22, Independent Contractor. The Parties recognize and agree that the Contractor is an independent contractor for all purposes, both legal and practical, in performing services under this Agreement, and that the Contractor and its agents and employees are not agents or employees of Boulder County for any purpose. As an independent contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for employing and directing such personnel and agents as it requires to perform the services purchased hereunder, shall exercise complete authority over its personnel and agents, and shall be fully responsible for their actions.
Contractor acknowledges that it is not entitled to unemployment insurance benefits nor worker's compensation benefits from Boulder County, its elected officials, agents, or any program administered or funded by Boulder County. Contractor shall be entitled to unemployment insurance or worker's compensation insurance only if unemployment compensation coverage or worker's compensation coverage is provided by Contractor, or some other entity that is not a party to this contract. Contractor is obligated to pay federal and state income tax on any monies earned pursuant to the contract relationship.
23. Third-Party Beneficiary. The enforcement of the terms and conditions of this contract and all rights of action relating to such enforcement, shall be strictly reserved to the County and the Contractor, and nothing contained in this contract shall give or allow any claim or right of action whatsoever by any other or third person. It is the express intent of the parties to this contract that any other person receiving services or benefits under this contract shall be deemed an incidental beneficiary only.
24. Prohibitions on Public Contract for Services: Pursuant to Colorado Revised Statute (C.R.S.), § 8-17.5-101, et. seq., as amended 5/13/08, the Contractor shall meet the following requirements prior to signing this Agreement (public contract for service) and for the duration thereof.
a. The Contractor shall certify participation in the E-Verify Program (the electronic employment verification program that is authorized in 8 U.S.C. § 1324a and jointly administered by the United States Department of Homeland Security and the Social Security Administration, or its successor program) or the Department Program (the employment verification program established by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment pursuant to C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(5)) on the attached certification.
b. The Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this public contract for services.
C. The Contractor shall not enter into a contract with a subcontractor that fails to certify to the Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this public contract for services. CONTRACT Page D-9
d. At the time of signing this public contract for services, the Contractor has confirmed the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perform work under this public contract for services through participation in either the E-Verify Program or the Department Program.
e. The Contractor shall not use either the B-Verify Program or the Department Program procedures to undertake pre-employment screening ofjob applicants while this public contract for services is being performed.
f. If Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor performing work under this public contract for services knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, the Contractor shall: notify the subcontractor and the County within three days that the Contractor has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is employing or contracting with an illegal alien; and terminate the subcontract with the subcontractor if within three days of receiving the notice required pursuant to the previous paragraph, the subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien; except that the contractor shall not terminate the contract with the subcontractor if during such three days the subcontractor provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien.
g. Contractor shall comply with any reasonable requests by the Department of Labor and Employment (the Department) made in the course of an investigation that the Department is undertaking pursuant to the authority established in C.R.S. § 8-17.5- 102(5).
h. If Contractor violates any provisions of this Section of this Agreement, the County may terminate this Agreement for breach of contract. If the Agreement is so terminated, the Contractor shall be liable for actual and consequential damages to the County. CONTRACT Page D-10
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have signed this Contract.
BOULDER COUNTY STATE OF COLORADO
ATTEST:______BY: Administrative Assistant Chair, Board of County Commissioners Clerk to the Board of County Commissioners
Signed this day of____ ,2010 Nunc Pro Tunc
(SEAL)
CONTRACTOR
Attest: By: Title: Title: (CORPORATE SEAL) Date:
(If this Agreement is executed on behalf of a corporation, it must be signed by an agent duly authorized by the corporation to execute such contract, and the corporate seal must be affixed to this Agreement by the Secretary of the corporation or other authorized keeper of the corporate seal. Authority of the agent to execute this Agreement must be shown by an accompanying resolution by the Board of Directors of the corporation, duly certified by the Secretary or other officer of the corporation.) GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BOULDER COUNTY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SHERIFF HEADQUARTERS REMODEL
A. COUNTY'S (OWNER'S) RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Information on services under the control of the County (hereinafter referred to also as the Owner) shall be furnished by the County with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work.
2. Based on the observations of the County's Representative and an evaluation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the County will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions on Progress Payments and Final Payments
3. The Owner's Representative will be the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents. He will make decisions on all claims, disputes or other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner but he will not be liable for the results of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. Decisions of the Architect will be final, if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents
4. The Owner's Representative will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents.
5. The Owner's Representative will have the authority to contact any regulatory agency concerning any alleged regulatory violation and to secure regulatory ruling or suspend work until such ruling is obtained. Such delays if confirmed to be an infraction or variance may give rise to charges against the Contractor by the County for delay of timely completion of contract work.
6. The Owner's Representative will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals, such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents.
B. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention and he shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract.
2. Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper
F-i GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-2
execution and completion of the Work whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
3. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him.
4. The Contractor warrants to the County that all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.
5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes which are legally enacted at the time bids are received and the Contractor will obtain any permits and pay governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.
6. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work, and shall promptly notify the County if the Drawings and Specifications are at variance therewith If the Contractor performs any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, he shall bear all costs arising therefore.
7. The contractor shall be solely responsible for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.
8. The Contractor shall review, approve and submit all Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
9. The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials or rubbish from and about the Project as well as his tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
10. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the County harmless from loss on account thereof.
11. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, the Contract documents and the County's representative including storage of any materials or equipment.
12. The Contractor shall promptly correct any Work rejected by the County as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and shall correct any
GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-3
Work found to be defective or nonconforming within a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion of the Contract or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Article apply to Work done by Subcontractors or Support Services as well as to Work done by direct employees of the Contractor. Corrections shall be made at no expense to the County.
13. Safety:
a The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders Of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons and property and on their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimize inconvenience to users of the site and shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety to, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
1. All employees on the work site and all other persons, including visitors and passersby who may be affected by the work;
2. All the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein; and
3 All property at the site or adjacent thereto
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at b. I the site who shall be assigned the duty of the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the County. This person will also work closely with the County's work superintendent on safety issues and attend regular safety discussions as set by the County's work superintendent.
c. In the event the County's superintendent or his designee notifies the Contractor's superintendent of any unsafe conditions or practices, the Contractor shall immediately take all actions required under paragraph 14a to ensure the safety of the work. If the condition or practice continues to present an imminent hazard, the County shall have the authority to stop the work until the condition has been remedied at no expense to the County. In no event shall the County be responsible for ensuring the safety of the work or for remedying the unsafe condition.
14. Liabilities: The Contractor shall promptly remedy all loss or damage to any property or persons caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by any one for whose acts or omissions any of them may be liable. These obligations are in addition to any other obligations under this contract. GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-4
15. Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Bond:
a. Prior to the execution of the Contract by the County, the Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the County a Performance Bond and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond acceptable to the County, in a sum equal to the nearest integral of One Hundred Dollars ($100) in excess of the Contract price, duly executed by a Corporate Surety qualified and licensed to do business in Colorado and maintaining a general agent therein. Such bond shall comply with the provisions of Section 38- 26-106, CRS. Such bonds are only required if the amount of the contract price is in excess of Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000).
b. Unless otherwise specified in the Bidding Documents, the bonds shall be written in the form AlA Documents A312, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond.
C. The Bidder shall require the Attorney-in-Fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his Power of Attorney.
C. WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with his own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, he shall make such claims as provided below.
2 Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect and consequential) to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by OWNER if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph.
3. Any claim for an extension in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-5
entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time shall be deter - mined by OWNER if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
4. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate his Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
5. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefore.
D CHANGES IN THE WORK
1 The County may order additions, deletions, or modifications in the Work by issuing a change order signed by its authorized representatives. These changes will not invalidate the Contract; however, the Contract sum and Contract time will be adjusted accordingly by unit prices or by negotiated amount where unit prices are not provided.
2. The Contract sum and the Contract time may be changed only by Change Order.
3. The cost or credit to the County from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement.
4. Questions concerning changes, modifications and other construction problems are to be submitted to the County for interpretations.
E. SCHEDULING
1 Work is to begin after the County has notified the Contractor to proceed, and a work schedule has been agreed to by the County and Contractor. The County and Contractor shall each have copies of this schedule.
2. The Contractor shall promptly inform the County of items which will not be delivered or accomplished according to the initial schedule.
3. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any other cause which the County determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable times as the County may determine. GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-6
F. PROGRESS PAYMENTS
If this contract is for eighty thousand dollars ($80,000) or less, partial payments shall be authorized by the County for work completed, if the Contractor is performing satisfactorily. Partial payments will be made based upon invoices submitted by the Contractor and certified by the County. Ten percent (10%) of each amount certified by the County shall be retained by the County until final payment is made. The Contractor shall make partial payments to his Subcontractors in the same manner as the County pays him, provided the Subcontractor is performing satisfactorily. 2. If this contract is for more than eighty thousand dollars ($80,000), partial payments of compensation due under this contract are subject to the provisions of Section 24-91-101, et. seq. CRS. If this contract exceeds Eighty Thousand Dollars ($80,000), partial payments shall be authorized by the County for work completed, based upon invoices submitted by the Contractor, if the Contractor is performing satisfactorily. Ten percent (10%) of the calculated value of any work completed shall be retained until fifty percent (50%) of the work required by the contract has been performed. After fifty percent (5 0%) of the work has been performed, the County shall pay amounts which becomes due as work is completed, while continuing to hold amounts already retained, if, in the opinion of the County, satisfactory progress is being made. The withheld percentage of the contract price of any such work, improvement, or construction shall be retained until the contract is completed satisfactorily and finally accepted by the public entity. If the public entity finds that satisfactory progress is being made in all phases of the contract, it may, upon written request by the Contractor, authorize payment from the withheld percentage. Before such payment is made, the public entity shall determine that satisfactory and substantial reasons exist for the payment and shall require written approval from any surety furnishing bonds for the contract work. The Contractor shall make partial payments of the amount due to each his subcontractors in the same manner as the public entity is required to pay the Contractor under this statue, provided that the subcontractor is satisfactorily performing under his contract with the Contractor.
3. If it becomes necessary for the County to take over the completion of any contract, all of the amounts owing the contractor, including the withheld percentage, shall be applied: First, toward the cost of completion of the contract; second, toward performance of the public entity's withholding requirement set forth in section 38-26-107, C.R.S.; third, to the surety furnishing bonds for the contract work, to the extent such surety has incurred liability or expense in completing the contract work or made payments pursuant to section 38-26-106, C.R. S.; then, to the contractor. Such retained percentage as maybe due any contractor shall be due and payable as provided by section 38-26-107,C.R.S.
4. Payments may be withheld on account of:
a. defective work not remedied; b. claims filed; C. failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, GENERAL CONDITIONS Pa2e E-7
materials, or equipment; d. failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or C. failure to keep the designated superintendent on the site. f, failure to obtain any necessary permits or licenses necessary to carry out the Work under this Contract.
G. PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certificates and similar documents.
2. Furnish a list giving the names, addresses and phone numbers of all subcontractors and materials suppliers who provided labor and/or materials for the work, with identification of the labor and/or materials provided.
3. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full use of the work and access to services and utilities, including occupancy permits, and similar releases.
4. Submit Record Drawings, maintenance manuals, operating instructions, and similar final records information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner.
6. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to Owner.
7. Complete startup testing of systems, and instructions of Owner's operating/maintenance personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mock-up, and similar elements.
8. Complete final cleanup requirements.
H. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of OWNER as evidenced by OWNER'S definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it was intended; or if there be no such certificate issued, when final payment is due in accordance with paragraph N of these GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BOULDER COUNTY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-8
I. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
1. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that OWNER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
2. Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion.
3. If OWNER does not consider the Work substantially complete, OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefore. 4. If OWNER considers the Work substantially complete, OWNER will prepare and deliver to CONTRACTOR a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment.
a. OWNER will within fourteen days execute and deliver to CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion with a list of items to be completed or corrected reflecting any changes from the tentative certificate.
b. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion OWNER will deliver to CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless CONTRACTOR objects in writing and so informs OWNER prior to OWNER'S issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, OWNER'S aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment.
5. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.
J. LIENS
No Mechanics lien may be held against a publicly owned building in the State of Colorado. Protections are limited to those set out below.
K. DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK
If the County determines that there is a need to correct work which has not been performed in GENERAL CONDITIONS Page E-9
accordance with the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract price maybe authorized by change order,
L. ACCESS TO WORK
The County and any architect/engineer retained by the County shall at all times have access to the work.
M. FINAL PAYMENT
Within ten (10) days after the Contractor's written declaration of completion of the Work, the County will make a final inspection thereof to determine whether the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If a list of deficiencies results from such final inspection, the Contractor shall promptly rectify all items appearing thereon, before final payment will be made. When the County indicates acceptance of the Work, the Contractor may requisition final payment, including retainage on account of the Contract price.
2. Final payment is subject to the provisions of Section 38-26-107, CRS. Any proposed final settlement for this work shall be duly advertised at least ten (10) days prior thereto by publication at least twice in a public newspaper of general circulation. Any creditor that has furnished labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provisions, provender, or other supplies used or consumed on this project by the Contractor or its Subcontractors, or that supplies rental machinery, tools, or equipment to the extent used in the prosecution of the work, whose claim therefore has not been paid by the Contractor or the Subcontractor at any time up to and including the time of final settlement, may file with the County a verified statement of the amount due and unpaid. Such amounts claimed shall thereafter be retained by the County from final settlement pursuant to the provisions of the statute.
In any event, final payment shall not be authorized until all inspections have been completed, and all work has been completed.
4. The making of final payments shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the County except those arising from:
a. unsettled claims b. faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion C. failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents d. terms of any special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
5. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Payment. GENERAL CONDITIONS Pace E-10
N. TESTS
The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as the Architect may require for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. The Contractor shall not use any material or equipment represented by samples found to be unacceptable. The Owner shall pay testing laboratory costs for materials testing. The Contractor shall give the Architect and testing laboratory timely notice for required tests.
0. MEASUREMENTS
Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the project and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings. Any difference that may be found shall be submitted to the Owner for consideration before proceeding with the work. The Architect and Owner shall not be responsible for the scaling of Drawings.
END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel
SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK (Bid #5277-10: Mechanical, Plumbing, & Automatic Fire Protection):
A. Project Identification: As follows:
Location: Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters 5600 Flatiron Parkway Boulder, CO 80301
2. Owner: Boulder County
3. Description: The project is a remodel of the first and second floors of an existing two-story building. The approximate square footage of the finished area to be remodeled is 21,000 sf. The approximate square footage of the unfinished warehouse space to be finished is 34,500 sf. The total gross square footage is 76,000. Approximately 20,500 sf will remain unoccupied. The building is currently unoccupied. There is ample parking and staging areas, both inside and outside. Note: Adherence to project schedule will be critical on this project. The deadline for overall remodel project completion is scheduled for November 19, 2010.
B. Contract Documents, dated February 16, 2010 and March 19, 2010 (and subsequent dates), were prepared by the Boulder County Architect's Office, MKK Consulting Engineers, Inc, and other consultants as noted.
C. The Work consists of all labor and materials required for the following items, as described in the Contract Documents. See specifications and drawings for base bid scope of work.
MECHANICAL REMODEL: Work consists of all labor and materials required for the demolition, upgrade, and redistribution of the existing 1-IVAC system, as well as installation of new systems as shown. Boulder County will be responsible for all cutting and patching thru existing walls, control parts and installation, and balancing. All demolition product and material shall be stockpiled on the first floor for disposal by Boulder County. All warranties shall be from start up date of equipment.
Work is tentatively scheduled to begin in late-April 2010.
PLUMBING REMODEL: Work consists of all labor and materials required for the modification and installation of all domestic plumbing and gas piping as shown and specified. Boulder County will be responsible for all cutting, patching, and painting. All underground domestic plumbing, including sewage ejector will be installed to top of first floor slab under prior contract. Do not include underground plumbing in this bid. Do not include storm drainage piping in this bid. Do include exterior underground gas piping. Boulder County will excavate and backfill. Contractor to place pipe and bed. Also, include piping in exterior sand and oil interceptor.
Work is tentatively scheduled to begin in mid-May 2010.
SUMMARY 01110-1 Boulder County Sheriff Headquarters Remodel
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS: Work consists of all labor and materials required for modification of the existing fire protection system, installed approximately 16 years ago, to cover the new tenant finish layout as shown on the plans. Heads shall be centered in new ceiling tiles (+1- 3"). Work shall be governed by all applicable codes. Existing engineered Fire Protection drawings are available to view on-site.
Work is tentatively scheduled to begin in early-July 2010.
1.2 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Contractor's Use of Premises: Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or employ other contractors on portions of Project and as follows: -
1 Boulder County (owner) will be acting as the General Contractor. The work to be done by Boulder County crews includes Demolition, framing & drywalling, interior door and window installation, millwork, and finish work, plus all electrical and special systems installation All work is to be coordinated with Boulder County crews, as well as other subcontractors as necessary.
2 Boulder County will be the Building Permit holder. Contractors will not be responsible for permit fees, but may be responsible for other fees. Contact the City of Boulder for information on any such fees.
B. Contractor's work must allow County crews and subcontractors access to building at all times from 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday.
C Contractor shall consult with County crew supervisor to determine locations for staging, if necessary.
D. Boulder County strongly encourages recycling of construction and waste materials. The County will provide recycling areas or containers as required
END OF SECTION O111O
SUMMARY 01110-2 SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks, before laying out the Work.
B. Progress meetings will be held at Project site every Thursday at 9:30 am, intervals to be determined. Owner, Architect, Contractor, and each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities, shall attend.
1. Minutes of each meeting will be prepared by Architect, and distributed to all parties present.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other submittals, and other activities that require sequential operations.
1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. 2. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor.
B. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent label on each for identification. Provide space on the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include the following information on the label:
1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier. 5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 6. Contractor's certification that materials comply with specified requirements.
C. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following:
1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements. 2. Notation of coordination requirements. 3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances, and furnished specialties and accessories.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Indicate deviations from Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Submit 1 reproducible print and I blue- or black-line print on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Architect will return the reproducible print. include the following:
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 1 I . Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale details, and other information, as appropriate for the Work. 2. Identification of products and materials. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
B. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Where variations are inherent in the material, submit at least 3 units that show limits of the variations. Include product name or name of the manufacturer.
F. Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains Contractor's responsibility.
G. Before the work begins, subcontractors shall provide MSDA sheets for all materials to be utilized on this project.
END OF SECTION 013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000-2 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART I- GENERAL
1.1 -SUMMARY
Boulder County will provide temporary services and utilities for: 1. Water 2. Power 3. Metering 4. Telephone
A. Boulder County will provide security and protection requirements for: 1. Fire Extinguishers 2. Construction fence, barricades, warning signs and lights 3. Building enclosure and lock-up
B. Boulder County will provide personnel support facilities for: 1. Sanitary Facilities 2. Drinking Water 3. Project identification sign
D. Each subcontractor is responsible for their own cleaning and trash removal.
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products of same kind from a single source.
B. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding construction spaces. 2. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for handling, storing, protecting, and installing. 3. Inspect to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure items are undamaged and properly protected. 4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction. 5. Store items subject to damage aboveground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Provide items that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation.
Provide products and equipment complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
B. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
C. Select products as follows:
1. Where these Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the item indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Where these Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the items indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 3. 'Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal," comply with provisions concerning "product substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer. 4. Where these Specifications describe a product and list characteristics required, with or without naming a brand or trademark, provide a product that complies with the characteristics and other requirements. 5. Where these Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-1 products that comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the application. 6. 'Where these Specifications require compliance with codes, regulations, or reference standards, select a product that complies with the codes, regulations, or reference standards.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of any product from manufacturer's full range of options.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered. Substitutions include changes proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract, in products and Methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.
6. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop drawings.
B. Submit 2 copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be replaced, provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed substitution with all specified requirements, and include the following:
6. A full comparison with the specified product. 7. A list Of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution. 8. Any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.
C. Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-2
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show installation that varies from the Work originally shown.
B. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, as Record Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into 3-ring binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following:
1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Shop Drawings and Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, and plumb; substrates within installation tolerances; surfaces that are smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; and application conditions within environmental limits. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory / conditions have been corrected.
B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions, including, but not limited to, the application of fillers and primers.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect.
B. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical components and materials.
3.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion:
1. Remove labels that are not permanent. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds. Replace chipped or broken glass. 3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean. 4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring. 5. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 6. Clean the site. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, even-textured surface.
3.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and similar record information. 3. Deliver spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 4. Changeover locks and transmit keys to Owner. 5. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance personnel. 6. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 7. Complete final cleanup. 8. Touch up, repair, and restore marred, exposed finishes. 9. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Upon receipt of a request for inspection, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
C. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires operation and maintenance to provide instruction to Owner's personnel. Include a detailed review of the following:
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000-2 I . Startup and shutdown. 2. Emergency operations and safety procedures. 3. Noise and vibration adjustments. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Spare parts, tools, and materials. 6. Lubricants and fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Warranties and bonds.
D. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, once the following are complete:
1. Submit final payment request with releases of liens and supporting documentation. Include insurance certificates. 2. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion. 4. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
E. Architect will reinspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.
1. On completion of reinspection, Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, Architect will advise Contractor of the Work that is incomplete or obligations that have not yet been fulfilled.
END OF SECTION 017000
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000-3
SECTION 22 0000 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Description of Systems The work of Division 22 includes but is not limited to: Plumbing Systems
B. Work Included Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating plumbing systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer on request.
C. Work Not Included (Specified elsewhere) Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. 1. Fixed concrete bases for mechanical equipment: Division 03. Anchor bolts, setting diagrams, base sizes and other required information furnished under Division 23. 2. Wall openings and Chases: Under applicable sections according to information furnished under Division 22. 3. Access Panels: Furnished and located by Division 22 installer as specified in Division 08 for installation by appropriate trades. 4. Painting (except plumbing identification systems): Division 09.
D. Related Requirements 1. General Requirements: Division 01 - All Sections. 2. Mechanical: Division 23 - All Sections. 3. Electrical equipment and wiring: This Section. 4. Common work results for Plumbing Division 22 0500 5. Plumbing Identification: division 22 0553. 6. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing: Division 22 0593.
E. Inspection Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 15 Sections and report any known or observed defects that affect the work to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with work until defects are corrected.
F. Existing Utilities
22 0000-1 1. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. 2. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. 3. Owners of all underground facilities shall be notified at least 3 business days prior to excavation so that the owners can locate and mark underground facilities. (Utility Notification Center of Colorado)
G. Definitions 1. "Provide" means Contractor is responsible for the furnishing and installation of. 2. "Exposed" means in equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "pushup" ceilings, accessible pipe tunnels, etc. where pipe is accessible. 3. "Concealed" means in such spaces as pipe chases, pipe trenches, above plaster ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe is inaccessible when building is completed. 4. “Conditioned” space, as it applies to duct insulation and duct sealing systems, means any space which is heated and/or cooled by the air discharged from a duct system which is located in that space. If air is delivered from a ductwork system in an amount unable to maintain space temperature in the 68°F to 78°F range, then the spa ce is classified as “unconditioned”. Mechanical rooms and ceiling plenums are classified as “unconditioned” spaces. 5. “Mechanical Room” means any space or area which contains equipment providing heating, cooling, ventilation, plumbing distribution, or mechanical/plumbing system utility generation and distribution capabilities. These spaces are defined as “Mechanical Rooms” even if they are called by another name (i.e. boiler room, chiller room, machine room, etc.).
1.3 COORDINATION A. General Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the Owner's schedule and the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit.
B. Utility Interruptions Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum.
C. Cutting and Patching See Section 22 0500 and Division 01.
D. Drawings and Specifications
22 0000-2 1. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and because of the small scale, it is not possible to indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Drawings are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. 2. Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. 3. The precedence of mechanical construction documents is as follows: a. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the original Drawings and Specifications. b. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. c. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted materials over graphic indications. d. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications for products indicated on the Drawings, the Specifications shall have precedence. e. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall have precedence.
E. Electrical Equipment and Wiring for Mechanical Division 1. Responsibility Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. Refer to the Mechanical/Electrical Schedule and Equipment Schedules on the drawings for additional information.
MD: Mechanical Division, 22 and 23 ED: Electrical Division, 26
22 0000-3
ITEM FURNISHED SET IN PLACE POWER CONTROL UNDER OR MOUNTED WIRING WIRING UNDER Equipment Motors and Thermal overloads, resistance heaters. MD MD ED - Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters, and overload relays. MD(4) ED(1) ED - Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, and manual operating switches. ED(1) ED(1) ED - Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, interlocks and boiler controls. MD MD(2) ED MD(2) Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls. ED ED ED MD Smoke Detectors (Duct ED MD ED MD(3) Mounted). (1) If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, power wiring and connections by ED. (2) If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any device they shall be furnished and set in place by MD, but shall be connected by ED. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any device, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired by MD. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by MD and wired by ED shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown otherwise on the drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. (3) Wiring from fire alarm electrical contacts to fire alarm system control panel by ED; all mechanical equipment control function wiring by MD. ED to coordinate locations of electrical contacts with MD. MD to coordinate locations of duct smoke detectors with ED.
22 0000-4
(4) Starters located in motor control centers as noted on ED drawings shall be furnished by ED.
2. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, complies with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard that is in effect at the bid date, or date of Owner/Contractor Agreement when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified or when the standard is part of an applicable code which includes an edition date.
C. When required by individual Specifications section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work until Substantial Completion.
D. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: See Division 01.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples, shop drawings and product data as required by various sections of Division 22 in accordance with Division 01. Make submittals to Architect. Do not make submittals directly to the Engineer.
B. Also Refer to Shop Drawings, this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation Base final installation of materials and equipment on actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.
B. Workmanship Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The good appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical efficiency. The Architect/Engineer may reject work if workmanship and appearance are not satisfactory.
C. Supervision Be responsible for and coordinate the work of all subcontractors working under Division 22.
D. Installation Procedures Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in proper relation with theirs. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades.
E. Properly locate anchors, chases, recesses and openings required for the proper
22 0000-5 installation of the work. Arrange with the proper contractors for the building of anchors, etc. and for the leaving of the required chases, recesses and openings including required space for fire dampers and sleeves.
F. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels.
G. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required. Maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all ductwork fittings, traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction.
H. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations unless specifically indicated otherwise, or where local codes or regulations take precedence.
I. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings.
J. Protection 1. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work or Owner's operation. 2. Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction with caps or plugs to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Protect fixtures and equipment against damage during mechanical work. 3. Provide protection for concrete slabs where cutting or threading of piping occurs, storage of equipment, etc.
K. Piping & Ductwork Testing: See Section 22 0593
1.7 REGULATORY AND CODE REQUIREMENTS A. Apply for and pay for all permits (plan review fees), fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work.
B. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner.
C. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner.
D. Comply with state and local code requirements and ordinances. Comply with
22 0000-6 requirements of the Utility Companies. In the case of differences between these requirements and ordinances, the most stringent shall govern. Call for inspections required by local building inspection authority.
E. Applicable Building Codes and Ordinances: Including but not limited to the following:
International Building Code, 2006 Edition International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition (where in conflict with IBC, use IPC requirements) International Fuel Gas Code, 2006 Edition Utility Company Requirements State Department of Labor Requirements State Department of Health Requirements State and Federal Safety and Health Laws
1.8 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General Comply with Division 01.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General 1. Comply with Division 01. 2. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contract limit lines of the building site. Off site storage will be allowed if permitted under Division 01 requirements. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements and off of the ground; any rusted or weather damaged item will not be permitted to be used. Make arrangements with other contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.
B. Acceptance Check and sign for materials to be furnished by others for installation under Division 22 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.
1.10 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior to Bidding 1. See Instructions to Bidders. 2. Material, equipment or service specified by name is used as a basis of standard. Equivalents to items named in the specifications may be used if accepted before bidding. Requests for acceptance shall be received at the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's office at least 10 calendar days before bid opening. 3. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L. AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed.
22 0000-7 4. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. 5. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, make and project manual identification number, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least (1) copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's office. Data may not be returned; reference addenda for approval to bid.
B. Substitutions 1. Comply with Division 01. 2. Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. 3. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. See Division 01. Furnish at least 3 sets for review.
B. Shop Drawings are to be handled in groups, each processed in a different manner as follows:
1. Items furnished that are specified by industry or regulating body standard and/or by performance or generic specification require no shop drawing submittals. Copies shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals. 2. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment named in these specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re-arranging equipment. 3. The following items require shop drawing submittals prior to commencing work: a) All fixtures and equipment, including items called out by manufacturers name and model number. b) All substituted items. c) All changes from the plans or specifications.
22 0000-8 Include copies of these items in the Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit shop drawings with one item per sheet so that a file may be set up for each specified item.
Temperature control, fire protection and other submittals requiring drawings or diagrams shall be submitted on the same size drawing and format, and the same type of mylar film as the construction document drawings.
4. Where shop drawing submittals are required, do not begin work until one (1) copy which has been approved is returned. 5. Review of shop drawings is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. Approval of a specific item does not include approval of the assembly of which the item is a component. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the Consulting Mechanical Engineer of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved.
1.12 CLEANING A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of piping, hangers, ducts and other exposed items of grease, dirt or other foreign material. Remove rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave equipment spaces clean and ready for use. Refinish or repaint items at the discretion of the Architect.
1.13 PROJECT RECORD DRAWING A. Comply with Division 01.
B. File at job site one copy of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved shop drawings, change orders, field orders, test records, other modifications to Contract Documents.
C. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes.
D. Legibly mark with red pencil field changes, such as the following, referenced to permanent and accessible features of the site or building as applicable. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. 1. Drawings: a) Locations of concealed utilities. b) Field changes of dimension and detail. c) Changes resulting from change order or field order. d) Details not on original drawings.
22 0000-9
2. Specifications Manufacturer, model number of equipment actually installed, revised construction procedures. 3. Shop Drawings Changes made after Architect/Engineer's approval.
At completion of Work, deliver completed Project Record Documents marked with field changes to Architect/Engineer .
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Submit three typed and hard bound copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals to Architect for approval prior to scheduling any system demonstration for the Owner and 15 days prior to final observation. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications.
C. The books shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items; each item shall be provided with a separate index tab. 1. Instructions (On Contractor's Letterhead Stationery) on who to call for service during guarantee period including name, address, and 24 hour telephone number of company responsible for servicing each piece of equipment or system. 2. Maintenance instructions (On Contractor's Letterhead Stationery) shall include: (can be referenced to manufacturer's manual with appropriate page numbers, etc.) a) Preventative maintenance schedule for fixtures or equipment cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment. b) Cleaning schedule of all strainers, etc. c) Methods and frequencies for each piece of equipment.
3. Manufacturer's manuals (current originals, copies are not acceptable) for each piece of equipment installed (including equipment not requiring shop drawings) identified by drawing code numbers as they appear on the drawing and in the specifications. Manuals shall include the following, as applicable: a) Description of unit and component parts: (1) Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. (2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests for pumps. Curves shall include flow rate, pressure, HP, RPM and efficiency. (3) Complete nomenclature and commercial part number of replaceable parts. (4) Installation instruction sheets. (5) Complete wiring diagrams.
b) Recommended procedures: (1) Start-up, break-in, routine lubrication and operating
22 0000-10 instructions and cautions. (2) Regulation, control, start/stop, shut-down and emergency instructions. (3) Special summer and winter operating cautions.
c) Maintenance (1) Routine care (2) Guide to trouble shooting (3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly (4) Alignment, adjusting and checking (5) List of required lubricants and schedule (6) Filter cleaning or replacement schedule (7) Parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. (8) Predicted life of parts subject to wear
4. All warranties provided by the Manufacturer on their equipment that run longer than the one-year warranty by the Contractor. 5. Valve chart(s) with schematic floor diagrams indicating valve locations with numbers labeled on valve chart. 6. All equipment start-up logs including certification of start up by manufacturer. 7. Balance Reports: water. See Section 22 0593. 8. All pipe pressure test certifications. 9. Domestic water sterilization certification.
D. Provide lubrication and filter maintenance charts, to be mounted adjacent to or on equipment. Charts shall provide information as noted above and shall provide a means for maintenance personnel to record when and what maintenance was accomplished.
E. These O & M books shall be considered a part of the final observation and shall be submitted for approval at least fifteen days prior to a request for a final observation.
1.15 FINAL OBSERVATION A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Prior to notifying the Architect that the project is ready for the final observation the Contractor must submit the O & M manuals 15 days prior and the Balance Report 7 days prior and shall verify, in writing, that:
1. All systems are complete along with balancing. 2. All systems have been properly started and are operational.
C. When the Contractor notifies the Architect that the project is ready for a final observation, the Architect will visit the job site and will prepare a final observation list of all the items on the project that shall be finished or corrected before the project can be accepted.
22 0000-11 D. When the Contractor notifies the Architect that all items on the above final observation list have been completed and corrected, the Architect will visit the project to ascertain that all the items on the final observation list have been corrected and can be accepted.
E. Architect shall be paid by this Contractor for all other successive trips to the project that are made necessary because not all the items in the final observation list were corrected at the time of the second visit described above.
F. The Architect will charge the trips according to his current fee, including transportation and subsistence.
1.16 WARRANTIES A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified.
B. Provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire plumbing work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one year(s) after Date of Acceptance. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates (include in O & M Manuals) for such materials or equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. Include dates of start and end of the warranty and manufacturer's representative name and telephone number.
C. This warranty will be superseded by warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for construction heating or cooling.
1.17 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Conduct demonstrations only after systems have been through start-up procedures, systems are complete and operating, and operating and maintenance data is complete.
B. Instruct the Owner's representatives on the proper operation and maintenance of the plumbing systems. Include seasonal concerns and operations. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of instruction.
C. Systems: All plumbing systems listed in these specifications. See applicable sections of Division 22 for additional requirements.
D. Contractor's Representatives: 1. Contractor's representatives shall have a thorough knowledge of the particular installation. 2. Manufacturer's representatives shall have a thorough understanding of each particular piece of equipment.
E. Scheduling: Arrange and schedule demonstration times with Architect.
F. Location: Conduct demonstrations at project including tours of systems.
G. Operating and Maintenance Data: Arrange for data to be at demonstrations. Include review of data at demonstrations.
22 0000-12
H. Time Allotment: Provide demonstrations of adequate time periods, except as noted elsewhere, to ensure proper understanding of systems by Owner's representative.
I. Furnish ladders, tools, etc. as required to provide access to all equipment and controls for demonstrations.
1.18 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT START-UP A. General: Verify that: 1. Building enclosure is complete. 2. Excess building materials and debris have been removed. 3. Building is broom clean.
B. Inspect preceding work to ensure that: 1. Electrical: Verify with Division 26 contractor that: a) Temporary services are disconnected and permanent utility services are capable of full load. b) Connections in main switchgear and sub-panels are tight.
2. Plumbing: a) Specified tests on piping, and related systems have been made. b) Operational and performance tests have been made.
C. Start-up and Testing: 1. Notify Architect at least two (2) days in advance of the start-up of plumbing systems. 2. Complete tests required by code authorities including smoke health codes. 3. Ensure that control systems are fully operational in automatic mode. 4. After test runs have been completed and systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory and ready for permanent operation, clean or replace permanent strainers. Properly adjust valve and pump packings. 5. If systems are not to continue in use following the start-up procedures take steps to insure against accidental operation or operation by unauthorized personnel. 6. The contractor to adjust settings thru first year as required by Mechanical Engineer. 7. Balancing shall occur after the start-up procedures have been completed.
1.19 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Comply with Division 1.
B. Approval for final payment will not be given until the following items have been submitted and reviewed. Refer to other sections of these specification for specific requirements: 1. Project Record Drawings. 2. Record of Piping Tests. 3. Sterilization Certification.
22 0000-13 4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Equipment Start-Up Logs. 6. Balance Report. 7. Spare Equipment or Material Parts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Applicable
END OF SECTION
22 0000-14 SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included in this Section 1. Pipe Supports, Anchors and Seals 2. Motors and Starters 3. Valves 4. Plumbing Excavation and Backfill 5. Pipe Installation 6. Supporting Steel 7. Pipe Testing 8. Flushing, Cleaning and Sterilizing
B. Furnish Only 1. Access Panels: For appropriate section for installation.
C. Related Requirements 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-concrete." 4. Division 08 Section "Access Doors." 5. Division 23 HVAC "All Sections."
D. Reference Standards and Codes 1. Comply with Section 22 0000. 2. The Colorado Primary Drinking Water Regulations (Current Edition). 3. AWWA Standard C651-05, Disinfecting Water Mains (Current Edition).
1.3 RELATED WORK A. Mechanical: Division 23 - All Sections B. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: Section 22 0593.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment in each of the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available thru one manufacturer (or vendor) for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner.
1. Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage) 2. Starters 3. Pumps 4. Plumbing Fixture Trim
22 0500-1 5. Thermometers 6. Pressure Gauges 7. Plug, Globe and Check Valves 8. Butterfly Valves (Individual valves not included in piping packages listed below) 9. Ball Valves (Individual valves not included in piping packages listed below) 10. Balancing Valves 11. Equipment Connection Piping Packages 12. Dielectric Unions 13. Strainers
2.2 MOTORS, PHASE PROTECTION AND STARTERS A. General 1. All motors and other electrical control equipment shall be listed per the requirements of the National Electric Code. 2. Submit motor phase protection and starter shop drawing per Section 01. 3. Motors incorporated into package equipment and defined as definite purpose motors are exempt from these requirements.
B. Motors 1. Motors 1/2 HP or less may be split capacitor single phase with sleeve bearings and a standard frame size and rpm. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron or steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. 3. Motors, starters and other electrical control equipment in moist areas or special conditions, such as explosion proof, shall be designed and approved for installation in such areas. 4. Motor wiring shall terminate in a NEMA terminal box mounted on the motor case and shall be of the manufacturer's standard size. The terminal box shall have a bolt type copper ground connector. 5. All general purpose motors shall have minimum full-load nominal efficiencies as listed in the following table:
2.4 ACCESS DOORS Furnish access doors where indicated and at locations where required for access to concealed valves, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be flush mounted, hinged steel aluminum doors and frames suitable for surface in which they are mounted. Doors shall be provided with primer suitable for finish painting. Non-rated doors shall have slot screwdriver type catch. If doors are installed in fire rated surfaces, they shall carry proper rating and be self-closing and latching. Zurn Acudor or equivalent. Access doors and panels in ductwork, air handling units, sheet metal plenums are specified in Section 23 3000.
2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. General
22 0500-2 1. Use adjustable pipe hangers on suspended pipe. Chain or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Provide hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Maximum Minimum Hanger Pipe Type Pipe Size Spacing Rod Size Steel Pipe 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 3/4” through 1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2” and 2" 10'-0" 3/8" 2-1/2” through 3" 10'-0" 1/2" 4” and 5" 10'-0" 5/8"
Copper Pipe 1/2" through 1-1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 2” and above 10'-0" 3/8"
Cast Iron 2" 1 Each Joint 3/8" 3” 1 Each Joint 1/2" 4” and 5" 1 Each Joint 5/8" 6” 1 Each Joint 3/4" 8” through 12" 1 Each Joint 7/8"
2. See Vibration Isolation, this section, for special hangers. 3. Hanger rods shall be continuous threaded steel. Rods may be reduced one size for double rod hangers with 3/8" as a minimum diameter. 4. Plastic pipe (PVC, CPVC. etc.) shall be supported at not to exceed 4'-0". Minimum hanger rod size shall correspond to the steel pipe criteria for various pipe sizes as noted in above table.
B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping shall be copper plated or plastic coated steel, adjustable swivel ring hangers. 2. Individual hangers for un-insulated steel and insulated steel or copper piping shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers for pipe sizes up through 1-1/2" and wrought steel, adjustable clevis hangers for pipe sizes 2" and over.
C. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000 or equivalent by B-Line or Superstrut. System shall be selected to support five times the weight or thrust applied without failure. Where trapeze length exceeds four feet, provide additional hanger rod at mid span. Hangers shall be spaced for smallest pipe in group. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe shall have standard pipe clamps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe shall rest on neoprene sleeves or 3M Scotch Rap 50 applied to a 50 mil thickness extended 1/2" beyond clamp edge and have standard pipe clamps at each support. 4. All insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall have standard pipe straps over the high density insulation inserts at each support.
22 0500-3
D. Insulated Pipe Supports Where individual hangers are used protect all insulated pipe at point of support with a 360 or 180 degree insulation insert of high density polyurethane foam, water-proofed 140 psi calcium silicate, or expanded perlite. Adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A, flame spread 10/smoke 0. Provide minimum G-60 galvanized shield for high density insert. Where trapeze hangers are used, protect all insulated pipe at point of support with 360 degree insulating insert. Encase insulation in a 360 degree sheet metal shield. Where insulation stops and starts for pipe clamps, ends of insulation shall be sealed with liquid mastic to provide continuous vapor barrier. Insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and be divided into longitudinal half sections as applicable and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Insulation insert for all cold liquid (60 0F or below) shall extend 1 inch beyond sheet metal shield on each end. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges shown in chart below. When pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10 ft., and for all pipe roller applications, utilize a double layer shield.
Pipe Size Shield Length Minimum Gauge 1/2” through 1-1/2" 4" 22 2” through 6" 6" 20
E. Wall Supports 1. 1/2” through 3" - Cast iron hook 2. 4” and Over - Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 3. Unistrut may be used for multiple pipe runs up to 3" in size
F. Vertical Supports 1. Provide friction riser clamps, supported and braced. Clamps for copper piping shall be plastic coated steel. Copper pipes shall be wrapped in 3M Scotch Rap 50 applied to a 50 mil thickness extended 1/2" beyond clamp edge. a. Cast Iron Soil Pipes: Support at not less than every story height and at its' base. b. Screwed Pipe: Support at 10 foot on center for 2 inch and larger and 8 foot on center for smaller than 2 inch pipe. c. Copper Tubing: Support at 8 foot on center for 2 inch and larger and 6 foot on center for smaller than 2 inch pipe.
2.6 SLEEVES A. Schedule 40 steel pipe (galvanized if used below grade or in outside wall) or plastic sleeves manufactured by PSI/Thunderline sized large enough to allow for movement and for continuous insulation. Sheet metal sleeves are not allowed. Sleeves used below grade and for penetration of water proofed walls shall contain integral water stop. Seal space between pipe and sleeve with Link Seal compressible linked rubber seals.
B. In addition to schedule 40 sleeves, prefabricated fire rated Through Penetration Fire Stop Devices and Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems for each specified and particular piping or conduit material for fire rated penetrations shall be allowed. System shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems or Approved Equivalent.
22 0500-4
2.7 VALVES A. General All valves of a given type shall be of one manufacturer and shall be listed with the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Pressure Ratings Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for minimum 125 psig at 450 oF and 200 psig at 250 oF.
C. Valve Connections 1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. 2. Thread pipe sizes two inches and smaller. 3. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. 4. Solder or screw to solder adaptors for copper tubing. 5. Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service.
D. Valve Operators 1. Provide suitable handwheels globe or angle and drain valves. 2. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sizes 2" and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sizes 2-1/2" and larger with a wrench with set screw. 3. Provide chain operators for valves four inches and larger located more than 7 feet from floor in equipment rooms. Extend chains to five feet from floor and hook to clips arranged to clear aisles. 4. Provide adjustable memory stops for all valves used in balancing service.
2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Flexible stainless steel annular hose with stainless steel braid or bronze hose and braid. Male nipples shall be used for piping size 2 inches and less. Pipe sizes 2-½ inches and larger shall be flanged (150# ASA). Copper couplings shall have sweat fittings. Connector shall be installed on the equipment side of shut off valves.
Manufacturer Screwed Flanged Sweat Masons BSS GU-MN BSS GU-RF BBF Thermo Tech Flex/Flo F/F/N F/F/F F/F/C Hyspan 4505 4502 4507 Metraflex SST MM Refrig.Vib.Iso. Streamflo SPCT SPCF
2.10 FLANGE GASKETS Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials as noted below. As applicable due to service, gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21.11, B16.20 or B16.21.
Service Acceptable Materials (Pressure/Temperature Rating) Domestic Water PTFE (1200 psig @ 500 °F)
22 0500-5 Gaskets shall be as manufactured by Garlock, Frenzelit, Vellumoid or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION Inspect preceding work in accordance with Section 22 0000.
3.2 MOTORS, PHASE PROTECTION AND STARTERS A. Motors: Provide capacitors to correct motor power factor to at least 90 percent where motor has a power factor less than 90 percent.
3.3 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements Base final installation of materials and equipment on job site dimensions and conditions. Job site dimensions shall take precedence over Drawing dimensions. Field measure critical dimensions and do not fabricate or cut materials to length until such measurements are made. Be responsible for accurate location of rough-ins as required for equipment being serviced.
B. Cleaning Ream pipes and tubes. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside before joining, leaving ready for painting or identification as required. All piping stored outdoors shall be flushed of debris before installation.
3.4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. General
1. Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Employment and OSHA. All pipe must be laid on bedding material with bell holes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. Comply with requirements of Division 31. 2. Verify locations of existing and new underground utilities prior to trenching and, if damaged by this contractor, replace immediately in an approved manner at no expense to the Owner. 3. For pipe laid in trenches below slabs on grade, compact bottom of trenches in accordance with Division 02 and the Geotechnical Report. Remove rock and stones from bottom of trench. 4. Do not place backfill over pipe lines until lines are properly tested and approved.
B. Compaction 1. Remove rocks and stones from backfill material. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten backfill and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. Puddling will not be allowed.
22 0500-6
2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper six inch (6") layer, forming the sub-grade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T-99-57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met.
C. Pavement Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line, preferred method is saw cutting. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed thirty six inches (36"). Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the Architect, Owner and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Shoring Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public.
E. Surveying Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all line stakes (1" x 2" x 10") and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade.
3.5. VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Support each pump, by Mason Industries, Kinetics Noise Control, or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows:
Mason Engr'g Equip. Spec. a. Pumps: (1) Close Coupled B (2) Flexible Coupled B
3.6 SLEEVES, BOXES, AND CONCRETE CURBS A. Major openings in the structure for plumbing work may be shown on the structural drawings, these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is this Contractor's responsibility to accurately set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe (not shown on the structural drawings). This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve.
B. Sleeves and boxes shall be provided wherever pipes pass through floor, wall and roof construction.
22 0500-7
C. Each sleeve shall be utilized for only one pipe. Blockouts for multiple pipes or individual pipes are not allowed unless indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Architect.
D. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceilings. In areas where pipes are concealed (i.e. in chases), terminate sleeves 1/4" above finished floor. In areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeve 1/4" above finished floor, except in mechanical rooms and rooms containing floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 2" above finished floor.
F. Pipes passing through exterior wall shall be sealed water tight by using liquid sealant or compressible linked rubber seals.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING Be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching for work under Division 22 caused by improper coordination or notification. Comply with requirements of Division 01.
3.8 PIPE AND DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS A. Where horizontal pipes pass through walls, and vertical pipes pass through floors or roofs seal off void between opening pipe and sleeve. All penetrations of exterior wall below grade shall be sealed water tight. All penetrations of exterior walls above grade shall be sealed weather tight.
B. Wherever any pipe, steel member, bracket, equipment or other material penetrates or passes through fire-resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with non-hardening caulk or other fire resistant material as approved by all authorities having jurisdiction. Embed sealing material full thickness of material being penetrated. Sealants used at penetrations of items which can be consumed in a fire shall be intumescent and shall be installed so as to fill the void left if penetrant is consumed. Sealants to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E-814 and classified by Walrock Hersey.
3.9 FLASHINGS A. All flashings will be done under roofing division except as noted or detailed elsewhere in these specifications.
B. See Section 22 1000 for vents and drains.
3.10 PUMP AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Where the suction or discharge of any pump or inlet or outlet of heating generation equipment is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings.
3.11 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Installation 1. Install piping without springing or forcing, and to clear windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to
22 0500-8 facilitate piping installation is not permitted. 2. Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops and devices necessary to permit free expansion and contraction without causing undue stresses. Make changes in direction with fittings. Support piping independently at equipment so its weight will not be supported by the equipment. 3. Install vertical risers plumb and straight, horizontal lines parallel with walls and partitions. Conceal piping above ceilings and within furring and walls unless otherwise indicated. 4. All piping shall be run full size as indicated on drawings. Any reductions in piping required by equipment connections shall be made at these connection points.
B. Clearance Provide clearance for proper installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and unions. Provide minimum 1/2 inch clearance between pipes after insulation.
C. Shut-Off Valves & Unions 1. Where indicated, provide shut-off valves and unions suitably located, to isolate each item of equipment, branch circuit or section of piping. 2. Provide dielectric unions at junctions of dissimilar metals.
D. Routes and Grades 1. Route piping in general locations indicated, in an orderly manner and to maintain required grades. Coordinate with other piping, conduits, ducts and equipment making necessary offsets to accommodate the same. 2. Install piping to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with use of available space. Group piping wherever possible at common elevations. Install concealed pipes close to the building structure to keep furring to a minimum.
3.12 INSTALLATION PIPE HANGERS A. Adequately support piping from the building structure with adjustable hangers to maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying.
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.
C Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches minimum after piping is erected.
D. Support horizontal soil pipe near each hub or hubless clamp with five feet maximum between hangers.
E. Support vertical soil pipe at each floor with riser clamps. Provide intermediate support with friction clamps tied to structure. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
22 0500-9
F. Insulation shall be carried full size through the hangers.
3.13 VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Provide drain valves at main shut off valves, low points of piping and equipment. marked on the drawings.
3.14 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access door assembly to be minimum size of 24" x 24".
B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required (minimum 24" x 24") to provide adequate access for service or replacement of components.
C. Furnish all access doors to the General Contractor for installation by trade responsible for surface in which installed. Provide instructions for location.
3.15 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. General Furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement.
B. Housekeeping Bases Concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment including anchor bolts and inserts are installed under Division 03 in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by the contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Bases shall be 4 inches in height and over the complete floor area of the equipment. The bases shall be located and sizes determined by the contractor furnishing the equipment.
3.16 DRIP PANS AND DRAIN PANS A. Provide drip pans or drain pans under piping containing liquids or equipment where indicated.
B. Pans: 18 gauge galvanized iron. Pans shall be two inch deep, with rolled top edges, and shall extend six inches each side of the pipe, group of pipes or equipment. Keep pans as close to the underside of the pipes or equipment as practicable. Seams shall be soldered, and pans shall be crossbraced as required to prevent sagging and warping.
C. Pitch each pan to a drain connection, for complete drainage and pipe a 3/4 inch or
22 0500-10 larger copper tube drain to discharge over nearest available open drain.
3.17 PAINTING Supporting steel shall receive one coat of primer paint in the shop after fabrication welding is complete, as specified in Division 05. Paint field joints with one coat of matching primer. Finish painting under Division 09.
3.18 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION See Section 22 0553.
3.19 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install nickel-plated floor, wall and ceiling escutcheons of adjustable type on pipes passing through walls, floor or ceiling in finished areas after painting is completed.
3.20 PIPE TESTING A. General 1. Test piping systems prior to concealment. Ensure that the test pressure which might damage fixtures or equipment does not reach such units by valving them off or otherwise isolating them during the test. Keep written field records of all tests. Each record shall contain, as a minimum, the date of the test, system or subsystem tested, test medium and pressure, duration of test, test results, name and signature of individual performing test, and the name and signature of witness to the test who is not an employee of the firm performing the test. Submit copies of all tests to Architect. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative and local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. Furnish all instruments required for testing. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six (6) hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours without loss of pressure. Any visible leakage or appreciable pressure drop during the test will be cause for rejecting the test. Additional tests will be required after corrective measures have been taken until satisfactory results are obtained. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all plugs, piping, valves, hoses and pumps necessary for the required tests and for proper disposal of the water upon completion of the tests. 2. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. 3. Test all reduced pressure domestic water piping, before connecting to units, at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 4. Test all domestic water service lines to PRV at 200 psig hydrostatic pressure. 5. Test all natural gas piping under 60 psig air pressure.
3.21 FLUSHING, CLEANING AND STERILIZING A. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, all piping except as individually noted below, shall be blown out with air and then completely washed out with cleaning compounds compatible with final fluid to avoid contamination. The systems shall then be flushed for the complete removal of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc., required for this purpose. Chemicals used in the pipe cleaning as well as all chemicals used for
22 0500-11 water treatment shall be chemically compatible with all elements of the piping system in particular the flange gasket material.
B. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with AWWA Standard C651-86, Disinfecting Water Mains, and all subsequent addenda. After minimum contact period, flush the system with clean water until the residual chlorine is no greater than the city water. Submit to the Architect, written certification that sterilization has been performed. Include a copy in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Provide a test analysis by the State Health Department of a random water sample, if requested by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
22 0500-12 SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and Install 1. Markers, tags and labels for mechanical pipes and equipment. 2. Pipe identification and flow indications. 3. Valve tags
B. Related Requirements 1. Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Requirements". 2. Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
1.3 REFERENCES Comply with ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Markers: Identify the contents of the various piping systems. Flow arrows shall clearly indicate the direction of flow. Utilize either of the following methods: 1. Pressure Sensitive Markers: Bradley Type B-350 or B-946, Seton, MSI, Craftmark or equivalent flexible film identification markers and tape, with legend size, color coding, and marker length per ANSI A13.1. 2. Stenciled Markings: Of size and color per ANSI A13.1, using clear cut stencils and oil base paint.
B. Tags: Brass or color coded anodized aluminum 1-1/2 inch diameter with edges ground smooth. Punch each tag to receive tie wires. Evenly space and stamp letters (1/4 inch high) and numbers (7/16 inch high) into the metal surface, with black letters.
C. Labels: White plastic laminate with black engraving, fastened with brass screws. Pressure-sensitive embossed labels (Dymo Type) are not acceptable. Provide labels of uniform size. Label all equipment unless a manufacturer's label is firmly attached.
2.2 STENCILS A. Stencils or Pressure Sensitive Markers 1. Conform to the following Schedule:
Outside Diameter of Length of Minimum Size Letter Pipe or Pipe Insulation Color Field 1/2" 8" 3/8"
22 0553-1 3/4" through 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" and 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" through 6" 12" 1-1/4"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. General 1. Identify piping in above ceilings, etc. as well as exposed to view except piping in finished areas. Provide identifying markings at valves, fittings, and equipment, at terminal points, at each branch and riser take-off, on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and at both sides of piping passing through walls, ceilings, and floors. In addition, provide identifying markings at 30 feet o.c. for exposed piping and concealed piping. 2. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 3. For pipes under 1/2" O.D. color coded identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 4. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. 5. Apply directional flow arrows adjacent to each pipe mark.
B. Pressure Sensitive Markers Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Marker adhesion will be tested for permanence. Replace any markers showing dogears, bubbles or other failings.
C. Stenciled Markings Apply after completion of finished coat of paint. Wipe pipe clean. Perform stenciled on markings without overspray, drips or other imperfections. Provide dark background when using light colored stencils on light coverings (i.e. provide black background if using yellow stencil on white covering).
D. Markers and Markings 1. Use an arrow marker with each pipe content marking. The arrow shall always point away from the pipe marking and in the direction of flow; color and height of arrow to be same as content marking. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow. 2. Apply pipe and arrow marking within three inches of each valve to show proper identification of pipe contents and direction of flow. 3. Apply the marking to the pipe so lettering is in the most legible position. For overhead piping, apply marking on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, so marking can be read from floor level.
3.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all valves and cocks in main and branch piping located inside the building. Use tags secured with brass 'S' hooks brass jack chains or bead chains.
B. Stamp valve tags with a unique prefix to indicate system, followed by a number. In
22 0553-2 general, the prefix shall match the system abbreviation used on the Drawings.
C. Provide a typewritten list of valves including: valve identification number, location, function, normal position, service and area served. Include additional copies in the operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Show valve tag designations on the Project Record Document Drawings and on schematic flow diagrams.
3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. Stencil or label base mounted pumps. Tags secured by tie wire may be used on small in-line pumps.
B. Water Heaters: Stencil or label tanks as to service. Identify the connecting pipes to each tank.
END OF SECTION
22 0553-3 SECTION 22 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems including but not limited to domestic hot water recirculation system and pump, sewage ejector pump. The testing and balancing of all plumbing systems shall be the responsibility of Boulder County Architects and Facilities Division.
1.3 RELATED WORK A. Related work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Requirements." 2. Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." 3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping and Pumps."
1.4 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE - 1987 Systems Handbook: Chapter 57, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
B. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
C. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STATUS OF SYSTEMS A. Water testing and balancing shall not begin until the systems have been completed and are in full working order.
B. Put equipment into full operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary testing, adjusting and balancing requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of available plans and specifications for the project. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that they are being installed properly for the need.
C. Before any water balance work is done, the system(s) shall be checked for the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
22 0593-1 2. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 3. Water systems have been flushed, filled and vented. 4. Proper pump rotation. 5. Strainer baskets are clean and in place. 6. Service and balance valves are open.
D. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.
E. Promptly report defects or deficiencies noted during balance or abnormal conditions in the mechanical system, which prevent system balance to the appropriate responsible person. Make special note of any discrepancy between tabulated conditions and specified conditions including, but not limited to, missing items, non-functioning items, items without final connections, etc., and call to the pertinent Contractor's and the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's attention. Rebalance and retabulate information as required by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer to provide a properly performing building.
F. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting and balancing. Make instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Adjust and balance all water systems within +10% to -5% of design flow rates. Check, adjust and balance all systems to meet the design conditions and tabulate all information on acceptable forms. All systems shall be checked for proper performance during design conditions.
B. Recorded data shall represent actual measured or observed condition.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock all memory stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
E. Leave systems in proper working order.
3.4 WATER BALANCE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Adjustment of hydronic systems shall be by means of balancing valves or fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing.
C. Where available pump capacity is less than the total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary
22 0593-2 restriction of flow to the other parts.
3.5 REPORT OF WORK A. This Contractor shall submit a minimum of four (4) bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least 7 days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include all operating data; a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the supervising engineer and affixed with his certification seal. Also include project altitude and any correction factors used in the calculations. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
B. A reduced set of contract document drawing indicating 'as-built' conditions shall be included in the report with all valve and pump locations clearly marked and all equipment designated.
C. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the contractor and the engineer is complete, the balancing firm shall furnish bound reports which contain the following information. All information listed below shall be included in report unless written approval for deletion of items is agreed to by Mechanical Engineer prior to start of balancing. 1. Title Page including company name, address and telephone number; project name and location; project Architect; project Engineer; project Contractor; project altitude. 2. Instrument list including instrument, manufacturer, model, serial number, range, calibration date. 3. Pump data including identification/number, manufacturer, size/model, impeller, service, flow rate (specified and actual), pressure rise (specified and actual), discharge pressure (full-flow and no-flow), suction pressure (full-flow and no-flow), total operating head pressure, motor data as previously mentioned. Include manufacturer's pump curves in report. For installations where pumps are sequenced for lead/lag, operation provide lead pump (each pump) and lag pump (all pumps) operational information. This shall include flow rate, pressure rise, discharge pressure, total operating head, and all operating motor data for both pumps at all operating conditions. 4. Calibrated Balancing Valve data including identification, location, size, manufacturer, model, flow rate (specified and actual), pressure drop (specified and actual), station or valve calibrated setting.
3.6 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Final acceptance of the project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received. When deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer, the balancing firm shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the report quantities in the presence of the Owner or Engineer for verification purposes.
END OF SECTION
22 0593-3 SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install: 1. Piping insulation, including valves, fittings and other piping accessories
B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Requirements." 2. Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
1.3 RELATED WORK A. Division 22: "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for Insulated Pipe Supports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Flame/smoke rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed index of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories Inc. label or listing (UL 723), or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove that fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. 2. Exceptions: The following materials are exceptions to the flame/smoke rating requirements specified above: a. Cork or treated wood inserts used between shields and piping at hangers on low-temperature piping.
3. Moisture resistance: Do not provide materials with flameproofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the effects of moisture or high humidity.
B. Codes and standards. Provide insulation conforming to the current editions of the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in accordance with the ASTM standards, including: a. C 167 Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal Insulations b. C 195 Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. c. C 335 Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation
22 0700-1 d. C 552 Cellular Glass Block Thermal Insulation (2000). e. C 921 Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketed Materials for Thermal Insulation. f. C 1045 Standard Practice for Calculating Thermal Transmission Properties Under Steady State Conditions. g. C 1338 Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. h. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. i. E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Provide and install pipe insulation in accordance with the following ASHRAE standard: a. 90.1 Energy Conservation in New Building Design (Current Edition)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with the following NFPA standards: a. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (latest edition)
4. Underwriters laboratories a. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of plumbing insulation in accordance with Division 01. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, K-value, thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to the site in non-broken factory containers with manufacturer's stamp or labels affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products and manufacturer's density and thickness rating.
B. Storage and Handling: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Store in a warm, dry location. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage during and after installation. Repair or replace any insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
22 0700-2
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Mason, Knauf, Armstrong, 3M and Imcoa insulation will considered equivalent and will be acceptable without prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Various codes are more restrictive on the use of certain products in plenums etc. This specification allows several methods of insulating valves, fittings, etc., but it is the contractor's and the manufacturer's responsibility to assure that the code authorities will approve any product to be installed on the project.
2.3 INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide insulation conforming with the referenced publications and the specified temperature ranges and densities, in pounds per cubic foot (pcf).
B. Exterior of insulation: Provide insulation with exterior surface that is cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling.
C. Physical changes: Provide insulation that shows no physical changes that adversely affect its qualities under normal use at the intended use temperature.
2.4 MATERIALS A. Pipe Insulation 1. Interior Use a. Fiberglass: One-piece molded three pound density fiberglass pipe insulation (ASTM C547, Class 2) with factory applied all-service jacket with self-sealing lap. Jacket color shall be white and suitable for painting with latex paints. Insulation shall be suitable for pipe temperatures from 0 to 850 degrees. Maximum k-value shall be 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degrees at 75 degrees mean temperature (ASTM C335). Jacket shall provide a vapor barrier with a permeance of less than 0.02 perms/in (as tested by Procedure A of ASTM E96). Shall be tested in conformance with ASTM E84 and not exceed 25/50, UL 723 and NFPA 255.
2. Exterior Use a. Fiberglass: Fiberglass pipe insulation for exterior use shall be the same as for interior use, except that the all-service jacket may be omitted where a vapor barrier is not required and replaced with a metal jacket installed according to Part 3 of this specification section.
B. Piping Accessories (Fittings, Unions, Etc.) Insulation 1. Pre-molded insulation sections: Pre-molded insulation sections shall meet the requirements for the adjacent insulation. 2. Tape a. All service jacket tape: Provide tape with pressure sensitive adhesive suitable for sealing all service jacket on chilled and dual temperature piping system. Tape shall provide a vapor barrier.
22 0700-3 b. PVC sealing tape: Provide PVC sealing tape with pressure sensitive adhesive suitable for use with pre-molded PVC insulation covers. Tape shall provide a vapor barrier. Tape shall be white and 10 mil thick.
3. Vapor barrier mastic: Mastic shall be a water-base product suitable for spraying or trowel application. Color shall be white. Water vapor permeance (ASTM E 398) shall be 3.0 perm at 1/16 in. dry film thickness new and 1.0 perm when aged. Surface temperature range shall be -20 to 200 degrees. 4. PVC jacketing and fitting covers: PVC fitting covers shall be used with fiberglass inserts or with fiberglass pipe insulation cut to the shape of the cover. Inserts shall meet the temperature requirements for fiberglass pipe insulation. Covers and jacketing shall meet the 25/50 flame and smoke developed ratings of ASTM E 84. Covers and jacketing shall be white, 20 mil thickness and be suitable for surface temperatures up to 150 degrees. Covers and jacketing used external to building shall be 30 mil thickness. 5. Metal jacket pipe and fitting covers shall be 0.016 thick aluminum or stainless steel. 6. Vapor barrier coating: Provide white, flexible, fire resistive vapor barrier coating. Permeance shall be 0.05 perm at 0.055 in. dry film thickness. Coating shall be good for temperatures at coating of 0 to 150 degrees.
C. Equipment Insulation 1. Fiberglass: For equipment having surface temperatures between 0 and 450 degrees, provide fiberglass insulation board or blanket meeting ASTM C 612, 3 pcf density with a k-value of 0.23 Btu-in/hr sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature. Supply with all service jacket if other covering is not specified. For equipment having surface temperatures between 450 degrees and 850 degrees provide fiberglass insulation board specified for these temperatures.
E. Insulation Accessories 1. General: Provide insulation accessories compatible with materials to which applied and suitable for the services. Provide insulation accessories that do not corrode, soften or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. 2. Adhesives, coatings, sealing compounds and protective finishes: Provide adhesives, coatings, sealing compounds, and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 3. Staples: Provide outward-clinching monel-metal type staples, 3/4 in nominal width. 4. Bands: Provide bands of galvanized steel, aluminum, brass or nickel copper alloy of 3/4 in. nominal width. Provide band thicknesses exclusive of coating not less than 0.005 in. for steel and nickel copper alloy, 0.007 in. for aluminum and 0.01 in. for brass. 5. Wire: Provide wire of 14 ga. nickel copper alloy or copper clad steel, 16 ga. stainless steel or 18 ga. soft annealed galvanized steel.
6. Wire Netting: Provide wire netting for exposed surface of insulation to be
22 0700-4 cement finished. Provide wire netting that is 22 ga., 1 in. galvanized mesh, with continuous 26 ga. galvanized corner beads having 2-1/2 in. wings. 7. Fire stop sealant: Provide inorganic fire stop sealant having 1 hr., 2 hr. or 3 hr. rating as required by building penetration requirement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Inspection Inspect work in conformance with Section 22 000.
B. Preparation All piping systems shall be tested and have all leaks repaired prior to the application of the insulation. All surfaces shall be clean and dry; all foreign materials, such as rust, scale and dirt removed; and where specified, surfaces painted, prior to installing the insulation.
C. Workmanship 1. Furnish and install piping and equipment insulation as specified herein. 2. Insulation shall be applied by experienced coverers per best trade practice and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed. Install insulation material with smooth and even surfaces. Butt edges firmly together. 3. Make insulation continuous through sleeves or openings in walls and floors, except when there is a required fire resistance rating. Where this occurs, fill the open space between the pipe or duct and the building opening with fire stop sealant. Carry insulation through hangers, including trapeze hangers. Butt insulation tight to high density inserts (Section 22 0500) at hanger locations and secure by taping insulation to inserts. Where pipe supports for vertical riser clamps and anchors must be rigidly secured to pipe, cut insulation around support, fill void around support with insulation cement and cover with vapor barrier mastic. 4. Make sure that covering material which is to be painted will be in satisfactory condition to receive paint. 5. Cover all exposed and leading edges of insulation with adhesive.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Domestic Cold Water Piping 1. General a. Unless otherwise specified, insulate all domestic cold water piping. Exceptions are: (1) Piping used exclusively for fire protection. (2) Chrome-plated tubing
b. A vapor barrier shall be provided on all insulated surfaces of the piping system. c. Install pipe insulation of at least the minimum thickness specified in Table 22 0700-1.
2. Insulation Installation
22 0700-5 a. Fiberglass Insulation (1) Apply insulation to the pipe by opening the seam and then closing it after placement. Flap edges should be down at the 3 o'clock or 9 o'clock position. Remove release paper and seal flap. Apply butt strips at joints. Rub down all edges with a plastic squeegee. (2) Staple flap on 6" centers starting at center. Seal staples with vapor barrier adhesive. (3) Seal all exposed ends of pipe insulation with vapor barrier coating.
b. Valves, unions, flanges and fittings: Insulate valves, unions, flanges and fittings as specified in paragraph 3.2.F.
B. Domestic Hot Water Piping 1. General a. Unless otherwise specified, insulate all domestic hot water supply and re-circulating piping. Exceptions are: (1) Chrome-plated tubing b. No vapor barrier is required on this piping. c. Install pipe insulation of at least the minimum thickness specified in Table 22 0700-1.
2. Insulation installation: Install fiberglass insulation as specified for domestic cold water piping. 3. Insulation of pipes under handicapped lavatories and sinks: Insulate angle stop assemblies and drain lines with foam insert covered with 1/8" minimum abrasive resistant exterior cover with fasteners located out of sight, Brocar Trap Wrap Kit 500R or 500HS, McGuire Prowrap, Truebro LavGuard, TCI Products Skal + Gard, or equivalent. Acceptance of installation quality will be by the Architect. 4. Valves, unions, flanges and fittings: Insulate valves, unions, flanges and fittings as specified in paragraph 3.2.
C. Condensate Drain Pan Piping Insulate condensate drain pan piping and fittings the same as for domestic cold water piping, to provide vapor barrier installation.
F. Valves, Flanges, Unions, Fittings and Pump Casings. Insulate valves, flanges, unions, and fittings in all types of systems, and pump casing as follows.
1. Option 1: Insulate with pre-molded insulation sections. Secure sections in place with all service jacket tape and trim insulation to assure an even transition with adjacent pipe insulation. Apply glass cloth circumferentially around insulation sections and then apply vapor barrier mastic over the entire surface to provide a vapor seal. 2. Option 2: Insulate with factory precut, two layer insulation and cover with factory pre-molded, one piece PVC fitting covers. Tuck the ends of the insulation snugly into the throat of the fitting cover and the edges adjacent
22 0700-6 to the pipe fitting. Secure the fitting cover with vapor barrier master or by taping the ends circumferentially with PVC sealing tape to the adjacent pipe covering. Tape shall overlap at least 1/4 in. and extend a minimum of 2 in. onto the pipe covering.
G. Exterior Piping 1. General a. All insulated piping which is "outdoors" or exposed to weather shall be provided with a suitable jacket or coating. Jackets may be provided as part of the insulation system if specified for exterior use by the manufacturer. Installation to be per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Insulation shall be carried through building wall and terminated with sealed ends inside building or continued as required.
2. Metal Jacket Installation a. Jackets shall be installed with metal bands securing the jacket in place. Bands shall be located at butt joint overlaps and spaced between butt joints. b. Overlaps in the jacket shall be positioned to shed water. Butt joint overlaps shall be wide enough to provide weatherproofing. c. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Minimum Pipe Insulation The minimum pipe insulation thickness specified in Table 15250-1 are for fiberglass pipe insulation and meet the Model Energy Code (1992) and ASHRAE Standard 90A. Thicknesses of other types of insulation shall be adjusted to provide equivalent resistance to heat flow.
Table 22 0700-1 Minimum Thicknesses for Pipe Insulation
Insulation Thickness in Inches for Pipe Size (2)
Piping System Types Fluid Run- 1" and 1-1/4" 2-1/2" 5" to 8" Temperature outs up less to 2" to 4" 6" and Range to 2" (1) larger Domestic Cold Water 40-60 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 Domestic Hot Water 105 -160 1/2 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
(1) Run-outs to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length. (2) For piping exposed to outside air, increase thickness by 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
22 0700-7
SECTION 22 1000 PLUMBING PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED (but not limited to) A. Domestic hot and cold water piping. B. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. C. Piping material, valves and specialties. D. Plumbing fixtures, carriers and trim. E. Domestic water heaters. F. Sewage ejector systems. G. Rough-ins for equipment and fixtures. H. Gas piping.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 22 "Basic Mechanical Requirements." B. Division 22 "Common Work results for Plumbing." C. Division 22 "Identification for Plumbing Systems." D. Division 23 "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping Inside Building 1. Piping from the service termination throughout the rest of the building, for buried lines; Type "K", hard drawn copper, wrought copper fittings using BCuP2 classification brazing alloy, for non-buried lines; Type "L", hard drawn copper, wrought copper fittings and lead free solder: 96-4 (tin/silver), Silvabrite 100 or Canfield 100% Watersafe (silver-tin copper). Where copper tube is joined to brass or bronze, use BCuP2 classification brazing alloy.
B. Valves and Specialty Schedule 1. Ball Valves 2-1/2” and smaller: Bronze, two piece or uni-body full port with chrome plated ball valve, reinforced TFE seats and stuffing box, lever handle and screwed or solder ends. 400 psi W.O.G., 150 psi saturated steam. 3" and larger: Carbon steel, uni-body, full port with chrome plated ball valve, reinforced TFE seats and seals, lever handle and ANSI Class 150 flanged ends. 285 psi W.O.G., 150 psi saturated steam. 2. Butterfly Valves 2” and smaller: Bronze, stainless steel disc and stem, VITRON seal, 175 psi working pressure, 350 psi W.O.G., screwed or solder.
22 1000-1 3. Globe Valves (Rising Stem) 2” and smaller: Bronze, Class 150, 300 psi W.O.G. screwed or solder; 2-1/2" and larger: iron or cast steel body, bronze trim, Class 125, 200 psi W.O.G. flanged. 4. Check Valves 2” and smaller: Bronze, Class 150, 300 psi W.O.G. screwed or solder; 2-1/2" and larger: iron body, brass trim, Class 125, 200 psi W.O.G., flanged. 5. Pressure Gauges 4 1/2” dial, bronze bourdon tube with 1/4" pipe thread bottom mount, steel case, white face with black lettering, screwdriver calibration. Accuracy to be 1% of full scale. Pressure ranges to be approximately double the expected working pressure of the service. Brass lever handled cock or needle valve, and pigtail. U.S. Gauge Figure 5801, Trerice 600C, Danton 101, Weiss or equivalent by Ashcroft, Dwyer, Foxboro, Marsh, Marshalltown, Mueller Brass, Wika, or Meriam. 6. Thermometers Multi-angle with 9" scale case with glass or lucite face and separable socket, red reading mercury, bottom or back pipe thread connection. Range at least 50% higher than highest expected temperature of the service and at least 20 degrees lower than the lowest expected temperature. Accuracy to be 1% of full scale or better. US Gauge MN-9, Trerice A400, Duro 9 EZ, Weiss 9 VS or equivalent by Davis, Copper, Foxboro, Marshalltown, or Taylor. 7. Dielectric Unions Union rated for 250 psi with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end and impervious isolation gasket approved for use on gas, oil, air and water lines. 8. Strainers: 2” and smaller: 250 lb. bronze or cast iron "Y" type screwed with stainless steel screen. 2-1/2" and larger: 250 lb. cast iron "Y" type flanged with stainless steel screen. 9. Press. Temp. Taps 1/2” NPT, nordel or EPDM Core, Peterson Equipment Company #710, Sisco BNO-500, or Hydro-Temp, MGP/T or equivalent. 10. Trap Primer ASSE Standard 1018 approved with integral air gap. Primer shall be pressure drop activated and all brass construction. Provide distribution unit as required for multiple drain connections.
PPP Prime-rite, Watts Series T20 or equivalent
2.2 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT AND STORM DRAIN MATERIALS (to 5 ft. outside bldg.) A. Piping Material 1. Sanitary Waste and Vent Lines a. Below grade to a distance of 5 ft. from the building: Coated service weight cast iron with bell and spigot fittings with elastomeric joints (ASTM C564 gaskets) or coated hubless cast iron with gasket (ASTM C564) type 304 stainless steel shield and worm drive and clamp fittings or cast iron couplings with type 304 steel bolts and
22 1000-2 gaskets (ASTM C564) approved for below grade applications and installed per manufacturer's installation instructions. Bell and spigot type pipe shall be used under building slabs, no hub piping is not allowed. From this point on, material shall be as specified under "Building Sanitary Sewer". b. Above grade: Service weight cast iron with bell and spigot fittings with elastomeric joints (ASTM C564 gaskets), hubless cast iron with gasket (ASTM C564) and stainless steel shield and worm drive clamp fittings installed per manufacturer's recommendations, galvanized steel pipe with cast iron drainage fittings with threaded joints or DWV copper with wrought copper or cast brass fittings using 95-5 (tin/antimony) solder joints.
B. Hangers Suspend all horizontal lines in building with adjustable split swivel hangers. RE: Section 15050.
2.3 GAS PIPING MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM-A53 Type E Grade B black steel pipe. 1. Above grade piping; 2 inches and smaller, use 150 lb. malleable iron fittings and threaded joints in exposed locations and standard weight socket weld fittings and welded joints in inaccessible locations and return plenums. 2. Over 2 inches, use seamless steel butt weld fittings and welded joints in exposed locations and standard weight socket weld fittings, same thickness as pipe, and welded joints in inaccessible locations and return plenums.
B. Valves 1. Lubricated Plug Valves Class 125, 175 lb. W.O.G. cast iron, screwed or flanged with low friction coated plug. 2. Non Lubricated Plug Valves Class 150, 175 lb. W.O.G. semi steel, screwed or flanged, Keyport 425, RS49, or Resun Fig. R-1430 or R-1431. 3. Gas Cocks 125 psi working pressure, AGA listed; ground joint, flat head, 3/4" & 1" only. Crane, Anderson Metals Corp., or approved equivalent.
2.4 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. General See Section 22 0000 for other acceptable manufacturers, substitutions and approvals.
WATER CLOSET WC-1 AND WC-2 WASHDOWN, ELONGATED RIM, FLOOR SET, FLUSH VALVE)
White, Vitreous China, 1.28 GPF, Siphon Action, flush valve Operated, Elongated Rim. China Bolt Caps to match the fixture color, set with "Plaster of Paris". Floor mounted with wax or Neoprene closet ring, glazed trapway, comp x comp angle
22 1000-3 stop with loose key operation - 1 key per stop, set screw type cast brass escutcheon. Flexible copper seamless tube supply, White open front seat less cover of style specified. White non-hardening adhesive sealant between the floor and the fixture base with "coved" finishing. Watts "Governor 80" combination relief valve and ballcock. All trim to be chrome plated copper or brass, chlorine resistant tank components.
See Schedule on Plans.
URINAL UR-1 (WALL HUNG, SIPHON JET, EXPOSED FLUSH, VALVE INTEGRAL TRAP)
White, Vitreous China 1.0 GPF, Siphon action. Flush Valve Operated. Wall hung from carrier with cast iron nipple, carrier to have both hanger and bearing plates. Provide white non-hardening adhesive sealant between the wall and the fixture with “coved” finishing. Top mounted flush valve for 3/4" top spud fixture, electronic operated, A.D.A. acceptable override button with battery backup. Valve to fail closed, cast wall flange with set screw, vandal resistant stop cap, vacuum breaker, and all Red Brass construction.
See Schedule on Plans.
LAVATORY L-1a (Countertop, China)
White, vitreous china, self rimming countertop, 8" centers, 19" round lavatory. Perforated Strainer with chrome plated all brass P-trap with cleanout plug and arm with escutcheon, supply and waste fitting, chrome plated brass loose key angle stops with escutcheons and flexible supplies, vandal resistant aerator to limit flow to 0.5 GPM. Provide the owner with one key per fixture installed - minimum of 2 required. Provide ADA compliant single lever faucet and perforated strainer.
See Schedule on Drawings.
SHOWER ASSEMBLY ADA SH-1
SHOWER STALL – SH-#
Shower shall consist of four molded components: A base with a molded-in drain, two side walls and a backwall. Each unit shall be manufactured from sheet molding compound, blend of polyester resin base with a thermoplastic additive, fillers, pigments, and chopped glass fiber reinforcement. The components shall be compression molded in high pressure hydraulic presses using heated match metal dies.
All components are molded with a swirlgloss surface and integral joints for proper alignment and interlock for a watertight assembly.
Shower shall carry a 3 year commercial and 10 year consumer limited warranty.
Mixing valve for concealed showers with metal lever handle, maximum
22 1000-4 temperature stops, inlet check stops, replaceable pressure equalizing cartridge and shut-off discs.
Exposed parts to be chrome plated. Provide self cleaning ball joint shower head with spray adjustment 2.5 gpm flow restrictor, shower arm and flange. All exposed parts to be chrome plated.
K-12101-P Freewill transfer shower in almond with Taboret Rite temp faucet K- T8228-4AK-304-4, and Master Components K-8520 or approved equivalent.
Provide drain fitting for fiberglass shower floor receptor, stainless steel 3" diameter strainer with 2" drain outlet. Provide with grab bars and seat frame.
SH-1
Kohler Freewill 45" x 38-3/8" x 84" four piece fiberglass shower stall. Inside finished dimensions 36" x 36" x 81-3/8".
SH-2
Kohler Freewill 52" x 37-1/2" x 84" ADA, fiberglass, barrier free. Inside finished dimensions 44-3/8" x 37-3/8" x 81-9/16" with fold up seat.
PROCESS SINKS S-1 (Single compartment – S.S.)
18 gauge sound dampened, #304 stainless steel, single compartment 33" x 22" x 12" deep self rim sink with extended back ledge. C.P. all brass 1-1/2" "P" trap with cleanout, supply and waste fitting. Swing spout faucet with and 3/4" threaded hose outlet with vacuum breaker fitting and 4" wrist blade handles. C.P. flexible supplies with keyed stops. Provide the owner with one key per fixture installed. Minimum of 2 required.
See Schedule on Drawings.
SINK S-2 (Single compartment - S.S.)
18-gauge sound dampened, #304 stainless steel, single compartment 33" x 22" x 11” deep self rim sink with extended back ledge. C.P. all brass 1-1/2" "P" trap with cleanout, supply and waste fitting with single lever swing spout and aerator. C.P. flexible supplies with keyed stops. Provide the owner with one key per fixture installed. Minimum of 2 required.
See Schedule on Drawings.
SERVICE SINK S-3
White, acid resisting porcelain enameled inside only 24" x 20" x 12" deep cast iron service sink with 12" high back and concealed hangers, 3" cast iron "P" trap standard, chrome plated strainer and U-shaped sheet brass rim guard.
22 1000-5 Rough C.P. all brass faucet with hose end spout, pail hook and vacuum breaker.
See Schedule on Plans.
DRINKING FOUNTAIN WITH CUSPIDOR DF-1
18 ga., Type 304 sating finish stainless steel, fully recessed drinking fountain/cuspidor combination. Front mounted push button valve and vandal resistant polished chrome plated bubbler and waste strainer. Cuspidor flush is activated when push button valve is activated on the drinking fountain. Provide piping from fountain to cuspidor spreader. Furnish mounting frame and all hanging brackets and screws for a complete installation. Provide 1-1/4" tailpiece and p- trap.
Haws, Halsey Taylor, Oasis, Sunroc, Elkay or equivalent.
DRINKING FOUNTAIN DF-2 (Handicapped, Dual Level)
"Hi-Lo" dual height, 18 ga, 304 stainless steel, satin finish with chrome plate brass bubbler, push button and strainer.
Stainless steel body, stainless steel top and trim. Must meet requirements of ADA and ANSI 117.1 Standards for visual and motion disabilities. Manufacturer to certify unit to be lead free as defined by the Safe Water Drinking Water Act. Wall mounted drinking fountain with integral strainer, C.P. All brass 1-1/4" trap, automatic stream regulator and screwdriver stop, self closing push bar valve. Push buttons located on front of cooler. Metal wall mounting plate. Include vandal resistant bottom plates and stainless steel back panel.
Mount with bubbler discharge height at 34 inches and 39 inches..
HAWS, Halsey Taylor, Oasis, Sunroc Elkay or Equivalent
MOP SERVICE BASIN MSB-1 (Terrazzo)
Precast terrazzo mop service basin, 24" sq., with 12" high sides and 3" drain cast integral with removable strainer plate, stainless steel threshold caps on all exposed sides, tiling flanges as required. 3" C.I. "P" trap with cleanout. Provide stainless steel back panels. Exposed rough C.P. all brass faucet with rigid hose end (3/4") spout and pail hook, integral stops, vacuum breaker and brace to wall. Mount faucet at 40" above basin.
See Schedule on Drawings.
WATER HEATER GWH-1 (Commercial, Gas Fired)
Natural gas fired, AGA certified heater for 180 oF operation and which meets ASHRAE 90.1b-1992 standard for energy efficiencies and rated for 150 psi working pressure. Tank shall be furnished with glass lining, insulated with fiberglass blanket, outer steel jacket with a baked enamel finish over bonderized
22 1000-6 undercoat and equipped with a boiler type hand hole cleanout. Provide magnesium anode rods rigidly supported for tank protection. Water heater shall be completely factory assembled, including pressure regulator, IRI approved gas train, steel burners and drain valve. Controls to be arranged for safety shutdown in event of pilot failure and include automatic resetting high limit. Provide lever handle ASME, T & P relief valve with automatic resetting. 3 year warranty against tank corrosion or tank failure. Burner rating below is input at sea level. Recovery rate is with 99% burner efficiency and 100 oF temperature rise. Set thermostat at 140 oF. Provide electronic ignition. Provide concentric vent kit.
See Schedule on Drawings.
MIXING VALVE MV-1
Provide tempering valve on 140 oF hot water heater so that water may be delivered to lavatories and showers at 110 oF. Tempering valve to consist of bronze body, sliding piston, thermostatic actuator and temperature adjustment set screw with locking nut. Lawlor type 21-LT or Leonard type TM.
RECIRCULATION PUMP CP-1
Provided by Boulder County and installed by Plumbing Contractor.
See schedule for capacities.
THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBER TEA-1
Welded steel, ASME designed, constructed and stamped tank with heavy-duty butyl diaphragm and stainless steel system connection. Maximum working pressure of 150 psi and maximum working temperature of 200 0F. Provide an air charging valve (standard tire valve) to facilitate onsite tank pressure adjustments.
See schedule for capacities.
Amtrol Wessels Model TTA or approved equivalent
FLOOR DRAIN FD-1
Cast iron drain with double drainage flange, adjustable (utilizing multiple thread interconnections) Nickel Bronze strainer and top, "P" trap. Drain outlet size to be the same as connecting pipe size shown on drawings. Provide strainers with a minimum free area of 1.5 times the free area of the connecting pipe. Provide flashing clamp device where pans or waterproof membranes occur.
Josam Smith Wade Zurn or approved equivalent.
22 1000-7
EQUIPMENT ROOM DRAIN ERD-1
Cast iron drain with double drainage flange and loose set recessed secondary strainer, "P" trap. Drain outlet size to be the same as connecting pipe size shown on drawings. Provide brass rim and Full grate as required. Provide flashing clamp device where pans or waterproof membranes occur.
Josam Smith Wade Zurn Ancon or approved equivalent
SHOCK ABSORBER SA-1
Shock absorbers to be in compliance with ANSI A112.26.1, ASSE 1010 approved, PDI WH-201 approved and pre-charged suitable for operation with a maximum temperature
of 180 oF and a maximum working pressure of 150 psig. Selection of shock absorber shall be based on fixture units shown on drawing.
Josam Absorbotron 75001 to 75006 Smith Hydrotrol 5005 to 5050 Wade Shokstop W-5 to W-100 Zurn Shoktrol Z-1700-100 to Z-1700-600 Sioux Chief Hydra-Rester Size A to F Watts Size 15 Size A to F Precision Plumbing Products Size A to F
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER RPBFP-1
State Health Department, A.W.W.A. IAMPO (2" and below), ASSE, and USC approved reduced pressure backflow preventer assembly, consisting of two resilient seated isolation valves, two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves and resilient seated test cocks for field testing. Working pressure of 175 psi, temperature to 140 oF maximum. Preventer assembly to be line size or size as called for on drawings.
Up thru 2" 2-1/2" and Larger Watts Model 009 QT 909 Febco Model 825Y 860 or 880/880V Hersey Model FRP II 6CM Wilkins Model 975 975 Conbraco 40-200 40-200
COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH ASSEMBLY ESE-1
22 1000-8
Combination assembly to include separate 10" diameter stainless steel deluge shower head and corrosion resistant stainless steel bowl with twin aerated eyewash heads with dust covers. Eyewash activated by hand and foot treadle. Shower head valve to be instant action stay-open rough chrome plated ball valve operated by pull rod with handle. Provide emergency identification sign mounted on adjacent wall. 1-1/4" supply connection located on top of shower column with shut-off valve and 1-1/4" waste connection on bottom of shower column and allowed to drain onto floor.
Install with a fail-safe tempered water blending station Haws 9202 in water supply to unit.
Stay open valve Haw 8309 Bradley S-1931-SSH-SB-HFO Speakman SE-607 Western W9209 Guardian G-1950-HFC-SSH
ROOF DRAIN RD-1
Cast iron drain with cast iron removable dome, flashing clamp device and gravel stop. Provide deck clamp and sump receiver or Zurn Deck Plate for all drains except when drain is installed in poured in place concrete roof. Provide drain extensions as required.
Josam Smith Wade Zurn Ancon or approved equivalent.
DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE DSN-1
Cast bronze downspout nozzle with loose bronze wall flange anchored to wall
Josam Smith Wade Zurn Ancon or approved equivalent.
HOSE BIBB HB-1,2
Chrome plated hose bibb with integral vacuum breaker, 12/" inlet, 3/4" hose end.
Speakman Chicago Faucet T & S Brass
22 1000-9 Water Saver Faucet Co. or approved equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WATER PIPING A. Water Service 1. Domestic water service is existing and all connections will be inside the building.
B. Inside Building 1. Run piping as direct as possible to required connections, and slope to drain valves at low points for complete system draindown. Locate drain valves at accessible points within the system. 2. Install control valves and thermal wells furnished by Division 23 0900.
C. Valves and Specialties. 1. Ball valves may be used for shut-off service. Valves utilizing lever handles shall be installed to allow complete open to close valve operation without interference of structure, insulation, etc. 2. Circuit Setter valves shall be used for balancing service. All valves used for balancing service shall have adjustable memory stops. 3. Valves used in insulated piping systems shall have extended necks as required for proper and easy operation after valve is insulated. 4. Provide isolation valves on all lines before they leave the mechanical, at each floor level, at the fixture take-off branch to branch take-off on all fixtures that do not have angle stop valves t the fixture (i.e. urinals, WC's). 5. Globe valves, where shown, are the only suitable valve. 6. Provide unions at connections to fixtures and equipment including valves when union trim is not furnished as a standard part of the equipment trim or where items cannot be removed from line without unions. 7. Dielectric unions shall be used at all connections of ferrous material to non-ferrous material. Couplings can be used wherever unions are not required. 8. Pressure gauges, thermometers, and press/temp. taps are to be used wherever shown on drawings. Press/temp. taps and pressure gauges shall be located in an accessible position and immediately before and after equipment with no valve or fitting between tap or gauge and equipment.
Install pressure gauge with isolation valve and drain valve between gauge and isolation valve and install pressure snubber or needle valve in services with rapid pressure pulses. Use thermal wells with heat transfer enhancement compound for thermometers.
9. Vibration isolation, see Section 22 0500. 10. Pressure Testing See Section 22 0593.
3.2 SOIL, WASTE, VENT (to 5 ft. outside building) A. General
22 1000-10 1. Connect to existing waste. Provide adaptors as required to connect into existing drainage pipes. Field verify actual termination location of all existing drainage piping. 2. Main waste lines within the building; provide a uniform fall of not less than one inch in eight feet. 3. Branches; provide a uniform fall of not less than one inch in four feet for 3" and smaller and one inch in eight feet for sizes 4" and larger. 4. Horizontal lines suspended from structure; provide hangers at five feet intervals or wherever necessary to insure proper grading. 5. Vertical lines; anchor at each floor level.
6. Fixtures; vent in accordance with sound plumbing practice and applicable codes. Do not install vents within two feet of roof edge, parapet or wall line of an "on the roof" structure. 7. Drain lines shall not be less than 2" when located below slab on grade floor. Drain lines below slab on grade floor shall not be less than 3" when horizontal distance is greater than 20 feet.
B. Cleanouts Install full size brass cleanout plugs on pipes up to 4" in size and 4" cleanouts on 4" and larger pipes, wherever pipes change direction 45 degrees or more or otherwise require cleanouts for proper cleaning of entire drainage systems. All wall cleanouts shall be located 4" to 6" above floor unless cleanout would fall behind permanent casework, then locate at 4'-6" above floor. Provide cleanouts at 50 feet maximum intervals for pipe 4" and less in size, 100 feet intervals for 5" pipe and larger. Cleanouts to have brass plugs with chrome plated cover plates for walls, scoriated brass cover for floor installed flush with floor and brass cover with carpet ring for carpeted area, flush with carpet. Submit proposed locations of all cleanouts for approval prior to installation.
C. Pressure Testing See Section 22 0593.
3.3 GAS PIPING A. General 1. Gas meter and service from the main to the meter are existing and upgrades by the utility company will be paid for by the Owner. Furnish and install all gas piping from the meter throughout the building and connect to all equipment required. 2. Provide lubricated plug valves, six inch long condensate dirt pockets and unions at equipment connections. 3. Take branches from top or sides of horizontal pipes, not from bottom. 4. Installation, materials and/or equipment not indicated on the Drawings, specified or covered by the requirements of utility of agency having jurisdiction shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" (Current Edition). 5. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting.
B. Pressure Testing
22 1000-11 1. See Section 22 0593. 2. After test, purge lines per NFPA 54 instructions.
3.4 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Fixtures 1. Install all fixtures and rough in according to the fixtures accepted. 2. All fixtures shall be secured to walls and floor or countertops in accordance with manufacturer's roughing in and setting requirements to form a rigid installation. 3. All pipe at the fixtures, which may be exposed to view, shall be brass chrome finish, finished with chrome escutcheons where they project from walls and floors. 4. Stop valves without handles shall be furnished and installed at all fixtures and at rough in locations. Furnish a minimum of six (6) handles to the Owner. Stop valves shall be furnished and installed at all equipment locations. 5. Securely anchor flush valves behind or within walls to be rigid and not subject to movement due to push or pull action on the valve. 6. Integral vacuum breakers shall be provided at all outlets with hose connections. 7. Contractor shall fill gap between wall and all fixtures located against the wall with white silicon sealant with "Coved" finish. 8. Install bottom of shower heads at elevations listed. a. Men: 6'-6" above finished floor b. Female: 6'-0" above finished floor
B. Valving Provide valves on all water and gas piping lines before they leave the basement, crawl space or trench. Install shut off valves for all plumbing groups of more than 4 fixtures. Provide isolation valves at each branch take-off from the main.
C. Hose Bibbs and Wall Hydrants Provide and install hose bibb in each equipment room where there is a cold water line present. Install accessible stop and drain valve in branch line ahead of each wall hydrant. Provide chrome plated hose bibbs in all finished areas and rough brass in all mechanical areas.
D. Water Heater Make connections between water heater and domestic water piping system with dielectric unions. Furnish and install copper drain piping from temperature and pressure relief valve for water heater. Drain piping to be same size as relief valve outlet and extended to floor drain or mop service basin.
E. Test Plugs Provide test plugs in floor drains and roof drains at the time of installation. Leave test plugs in place for the duration of construction. Install strainers and domes as required immediately after completion of finish floor and roof installation.
F. Sewage Ejectors Provide flange and clamping ring on sumps to clamp in membrane where water
22 1000-12 proof membrane occurs.
G. Backflow Preventer 1. Install backflow preventers of the same size as the line sizes in which installed except as otherwise noted. 2. Install air gap funnel drain under the relief valve discharge and run full size drain line from funnel drain to floor drain. Size drain line per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Provide line size strainer upstream of all backflow preventers. 4. All backflow prevention devices must be tested by a certified cross- connection control technician, with copies of report included in O & M manuals.
H. Shock Absorbers Isolate each absorber with a ball valve. Place in accessible location not more than 6" from access door. Provide access doors as required; re: Section 15050. Selection of shock absorber size shall be based on fixture units shown on the drawings.
3.5 FLASHINGS A. Provide flashing as recommended by roofing manufacturer for each vent or stack.
B. Flash all drains (i.e. roof, floor, etc.) not installed in slab on grade with 36 inch square, 4 lb/sq.ft. sheet lead, or chlorinated polyethylene factory laminated to 15 lb. felt. Clamp flashing into drain.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Make final adjustment of tempering valves under maximum flow conditions to discharge temperature called for in these specifications.
B. Clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand and dirt.
C. At completion, thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
D. Adjust flush valves, faucets, showers, bubblers for proper flow, after cleaning and flushing operations are accomplished.
E. Upon completion of water heater installation, verify satisfactory control operation under maximum demand operation as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust discharge water temperature. Make control adjustments required.
F. Adjust balancing valves in domestic hot water recirculation lines to insure quick delivery of hot water to fixtures. Set memory stops.
3.7 PROTECTION Protect fixtures and related components from damage before, during and after installation to date of final acceptance or owner move-in. Provide protective coverings or other protection as required.
3.8 RECIRCULATION PUMP
22 1000-13 A. Install pump in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Provide access space around pump for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Install pump to allow complete removal without dismantling connecting pipe.
D. Provide line sized shut-off valve on pump suction and line sized check valve and globe valve on pump discharge.
E. Lubricate pump in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations after completion of system installation and prior to start-up.
END OF SECTION
22 1000-14 SECTION 23 0000 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Description of Systems The work of Division 23 includes but is not limited to: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems
B. Work Included Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil and grease. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer on request.
C. Work Not Included (Specified elsewhere) Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. 1. Fixed concrete bases for mechanical equipment: Division 03. Anchor bolts, setting diagrams, base sizes and other required information furnished under Division 23. 2. Concrete for inertia bases for mechanical equipment: Division 03. Steel forms provided under Division 23. 3. Masonry wall opening lintels: Division 04. 4. Wall openings and Chases: Under applicable sections according to information furnished under Division 23. 5. Access Panels: Furnished and located by Division 23 installer as specified in Division 08 for installation by appropriate trades. 6. Painting (except mechanical identification systems): Division 09. 7. Roof Curbs: Curbs for all equipment located on the roof shall be furnished under Division 06 except for any prefab curbs specified herein. Roof flashings to be specified under Division 07. All counter flashing shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor of the same material as specified in Division 07.
D. Related Requirements 1. General Requirements: Division 15 - All Sections. 2. Mechanical: Division 23 - All Sections. 3. Electrical equipment and wiring: This Section and Division 26.
23 0000-1 4. Plumbing Division 22: All Sections.
E. Inspection Inspect work proceeding or interfacing with work of Division 15 Sections and report any known or observed defects that affect the work to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with work until defects are corrected.
F. Existing Utilities 1. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. 2. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. 3. Owners of all underground facilities shall be notified at least 3 business days prior to excavation so that the owners can locate and mark underground facilities. (Utility Notification Center of Colorado)
G. Definitions 1. "Provide" means Contractor is responsible for the furnishing and installation of. 2. "Exposed" means in equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "pushup" ceilings, accessible pipe tunnels, etc. where pipe is accessible. 3. "Concealed" means in such spaces as pipe chases, pipe trenches, above plaster ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe is inaccessible when building is completed. 4. “Conditioned” space, as it applies to duct insulation and duct sealing systems, means any space which is heated and/or cooled by the air discharged from a duct system which is located in that space. If air is delivered from a ductwork system in an amount unable to maintain space temperature in the 68°F to 78°F range, then the spa ce is classified as “unconditioned”. Mechanical rooms and ceiling plenums are classified as “unconditioned” spaces. 5. “Mechanical Room” means any space or area which contains equipment providing heating, cooling, ventilation, plumbing distribution, or mechanical/plumbing system utility generation and distribution capabilities. These spaces are defined as “Mechanical Rooms” even if they are called by another name (i.e. boiler room, chiller room, machine room, etc.).
1.3 COORDINATION A. General Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the Owner's schedule and the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit.
23 0000-2 B. Utility Interruptions Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum.
C. Cutting and Patching See Section 23 0500 and Division 01.
D. Drawings and Specifications 1. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and because of the small scale, it is not possible to indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Drawings are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. 2. Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes necessary. 3. The precedence of mechanical construction documents is as follows: a. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the original Drawings and Specifications. b. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. c. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted materials over graphic indications. d. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications for products indicated on the Drawings, the Specifications shall have precedence. e. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall have precedence.
E. Electrical Equipment and Wiring for Mechanical Division 1. Responsibility Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. Refer to the Mechanical/Electrical Schedule and Equipment Schedules on the drawings for additional information.
MD: Mechanical Division, 22 and 23 ED: Electrical Division, 26
23 0000-3
ITEM FURNISHED SET IN PLACE POWER CONTROL UNDER OR MOUNTED WIRING WIRING UNDER Equipment Motors and Thermal overloads, resistance heaters. MD MD ED - Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters, and overload relays. ED(4) ED(1) ED - Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, and manual operating switches. ED(1) ED(1) ED - Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, interlocks and boiler controls. MD MD(2) ED MD(2) Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls. ED ED ED MD Smoke Detectors (Duct ED ED ED ED(3) Mounted). (1) If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, power wiring and connections by ED. (2) If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any device they shall be furnished and set in place by MD, but shall be connected by ED. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any device, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired by MD. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by MD and wired by ED shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown otherwise on the drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. (3) Wiring from fire alarm electrical contacts to fire alarm system control panel by ED; all mechanical equipment control function wiring by MD. ED to coordinate locations of electrical contacts with MD. MD to coordinate locations of duct smoke detectors with ED.
23 0000-4 (4) Packaged unitary equipment controls and fire/smoke assembled damper/actuators by MD.
2. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard that is in effect at the bid date, or date of Owner/Contractor Agreement when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified or when the standard is part of an applicable code which includes an edition date.
C. When required by individual Specifications section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work until Substantial Completion.
D. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: See Division 01.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples, shop drawings and product data as required by various sections of Division 23 in accordance with Division 01. Make submittals to Architect. Do not make submittals directly to the Engineer.
B. Also Refer to Shop Drawings, this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation Base final installation of materials and equipment on actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.
B. Workmanship Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The good appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical efficiency. The Architect/Engineer may reject work if workmanship and appearance are not satisfactory.
C. Supervision Be responsible for and coordinate the work of all subcontractors working under Division 23.
D. Installation Procedures Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in proper relation with theirs. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades.
E. Properly locate anchors, chases, recesses and openings required for the proper installation of the work. Arrange with the proper contractors for the building of
23 0000-5 anchors, etc. and for the leaving of the required chases, recesses and openings including required space for fire dampers and sleeves.
F. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels.
G. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required. Maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all ductwork fittings, traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction.
H. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations unless specifically indicated otherwise, or where local codes or regulations take precedence.
I. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings.
J. Protection 1. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work or Owner's operation. 2. Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction with caps or plugs to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Protect fixtures and equipment against damage during mechanical work. 3. Provide protection for concrete slabs where cutting or threading of piping occurs, storage of equipment, etc.
K. Piping & Ductwork Testing: See Section 23 0593
1.7 REGULATORY AND CODE REQUIREMENTS A. Apply for and pay for all permits (plan review fees), fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work.
B. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner.
C. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner.
D. Comply with state and local code requirements and ordinances. Comply with requirements of the Utility Companies. In the case of differences between these
23 0000-6 requirements and ordinances, the most stringent shall govern. Call for inspections required by local building inspection authority.
E. Applicable Building Codes and Ordinances: Including but not limited to the following:
International Building Code, 2006 Edition International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition (where in conflict International Fire Code, 2000 Edition International Fuel Gas Code, 2006 Edition International Energy Conservation Code, 2006 Edition Governing Fire Department Requirements Utility Company Requirements State Department of Labor Requirements State Department of Health Requirements National Fire Protection Association Standards State and Federal Safety and Health Laws NFPA 70 2006 Edition - National Electrical Code NFPA 90A 2006 Edition - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
1.8 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General Comply with Division 01.
B. Temporary Heating or Cooling 1. Temporary heating or cooling will be furnished by the General Contractor. See Division 01. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the Consulting Mechanical Engineer and Owner. In case where the permanent heating or cooling system is approved for use as temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. These costs shall include but not be limited to natural gas, electricity, water, chemical treatment, salt and filter media. 2. If the permanent heating system is authorized for use, the building must be totally enclosed with final materials and no temporary barriers unless acceptable to Architect, and source of heat supply is permanently installed. System must be sufficiently complete, including controls, to permit its safe operation as acceptable to the Mechanical Contractor. Mechanical Contractor is solely responsible for the safe operation of the system. 3. Once the heating system has been placed into operation, do not shut down except for moderate weather. Maintain heated areas at a minimum temperature of 50 0F and a maximum of 85 oF 24 hours a day. 4. When any air handling equipment is used for temporary heat, install and maintain temporary filters. Before building acceptance by Owner, install new filters. This is over and above any extra set(s) of filters to be provided the Owner as called for in the specifications. Clean coils if necessary, as determined by the Architect.
23 0000-7
5. Systems used for temporary heat are the Contractor's responsibility to maintain, and put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner. 6. Equipment warranties that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be extended by the Contractor so that the Owner will have the full one year warranty required by the Contract Documents from the date of acceptance of the building.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General 1. Comply with Division 01. 2. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contract limit lines of the building site. Off site storage will be allowed if permitted under Division 01 requirements. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements and off of the ground; any rusted or weather damaged item will not be permitted to be used. Make arrangements with other contractors on the job for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.
B. Acceptance Check and sign for materials to be furnished by others for installation under Division 23 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.
1.10 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior to Bidding 1. See Instructions to Bidders. 2. Material, equipment or service specified by name is used as a basis of standard. Equivalents to items named in the specifications may be used if accepted before bidding. Requests for acceptance shall be received at the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's office at least 10 calendar days before bid opening. 3. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L. AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed. 4. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. 5. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, make and project manual identification number, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least (1) copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's office. Data may not be returned; reference addenda for approval to bid.
23 0000-8
B. Substitutions 1. Comply with Division 01. 2. Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. 3. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. See Division 01. Furnish at least 3 sets for review.
B. Shop Drawings are to be handled in groups, each processed in a different manner as follows:
1. Items furnished that are specified by industry or regulating body standard and/or by performance or generic specification require no shop drawing submittals. Copies shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals. 2. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment named in these specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re-arranging equipment. 3. The following items require shop drawing submittals prior to commencing work: a) All equipment, including items called out by manufacturers name and model number. b) All substituted items. c) All changes from the plans or specifications. d) Temperature Controls. e) Motors, Phase Protection and Starters.
Include copies of these items in the Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit shop drawings with one item per sheet so that a file may be set up for each specified item.
Temperature control and other submittals requiring drawings or diagrams shall be submitted on the same size drawing and format, and the same type of material as the construction document drawings.
4. Where shop drawing submittals are required, do not begin work until one (1) copy which has been approved is returned.
23 0000-9 5. Review of shop drawings is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. Approval of a specific item does not include approval of the assembly of which the item is a component. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the Consulting Mechanical Engineer of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved.
1.12 CLEANING A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of piping, hangers, ducts and other exposed items of grease, dirt or other foreign material. Remove rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave equipment spaces clean and ready for use. Refinish or repaint items at the discretion of the Architect.
1.13 PROJECT RECORD DRAWING A. Comply with Division 01.
B. File at job site one copy of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved shop drawings, change orders, field orders, test records, other modifications to Contract Documents.
C. Temperature control drawings shall be in the same drawing size and format, and the same type of material as the construction document. Also provide complete 11" x 17" as-built prints and AutoCad Drawings and field component labeling and computer files upon completion.
D. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes.
E. Legibly mark with red pencil field changes, such as the following, referenced to permanent and accessible features of the site or building as applicable. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. 1. Drawings: a) Locations of underground work. b) Locations of concealed utilities. c) Field changes of dimension and detail. d) Changes resulting from change order or field order. e) Details not on original drawings.
2. Specifications Manufacturer, model number of equipment actually installed, revised construction procedures.
23 0000-10 3. Shop Drawings Changes made after Architect/Engineer's approval.
At completion of Work, deliver completed Project Record Documents marked with field changes to Architect/Engineer, including temperature control and fire Protection "record" shop drawings.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Submit three typed and hard bound copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals to Architect for approval prior to scheduling any system demonstration for the Owner and 15 days prior to final observation. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications.
C. The books shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items; each item shall be provided with a separate index tab. 1. Instructions (On Contractor's Letterhead Stationery) on who to call for service during guarantee period including name, address, and 24 hour telephone number of company responsible for servicing each piece of equipment or system. 2. Maintenance instructions (On Contractor's Letterhead Stationery) shall include: (can be referenced to manufacturer's manual with appropriate page numbers, etc.) a) Preventative maintenance schedule for necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment of all items such as belt drives, safety controls, oil and refrigerant charges. b) Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, etc. c) Filter cleaning and/or replacement schedule. d) Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies for each piece of equipment. e) Water treatment recommendations for heating water and chilled water systems. f) Belt and filter chart showing size and quantity required for each applicable piece of equipment.
3. Manufacturer's manuals (current originals, copies are not acceptable) for each piece of equipment installed (including equipment not requiring shop drawings) identified by drawing code numbers as they appear on the drawing and in the specifications. Manuals shall include the following, as applicable: a) Description of unit and component parts: (1) Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. (2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests for pumps and fans. Curves shall include flow rate, pressure, HP, RPM and efficiency. (3) Complete nomenclature and commercial part number of replaceable parts. (4) Installation instruction sheets.
23 0000-11 (5) Complete wiring diagrams.
b) Recommended procedures: (1) Start-up, break-in, routine lubrication and operating instructions and cautions. (2) Regulation, control, start/stop, shut-down and emergency instructions. (3) Special summer and winter operating cautions.
c) Maintenance (1) Routine care (2) Guide to trouble shooting (3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly (4) Alignment, adjusting and checking (5) Water treatment (6) List of required lubricants and schedule (7) Filter cleaning or replacement schedule (8) Parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. (9) Predicted life of parts subject to wear
4. All warranties provided by the Manufacturer on their equipment that run longer than the one-year warranty by the Contractor. 5. Valve chart(s) with schematic floor diagrams indicating valve locations with numbers labeled on valve chart. 6. All temperature control diagrams and sequences (as-builts on the same size drawings and format, and same type of mylar film construction document drawings.) and component descriptive literature. See Section 23 0900. 7. All equipment start-up logs including certification of start up by manufacturer. 8. Balance Reports: air and water. See Section 23 0593. 9. All pipe and ductwork pressure test certifications.
D. Provide lubrication and filter maintenance charts, to be mounted adjacent to or on equipment. Charts shall provide information as noted above and shall provide a means for maintenance personnel to record when and what maintenance was accomplished.
E. These O & M books shall be considered a part of the final observation and shall be submitted for approval at least fifteen days prior to a request for a final observation.
1.15 FINAL OBSERVATION A. Comply with Division 01.
B. Prior to notifying the Architect that the project is ready for the final observation the Contractor must submit the O & M manuals 15 days prior and the Balance Report 7 days prior and shall verify, in writing, that: 1. All systems are complete along with balancing.
23 0000-12 2. All systems have been properly started and are operational. 3. All controls are complete, operational and sequences have been checked and are functioning properly.
C. When the Contractor notifies the Architect that the project is ready for a final observation, the Architect will visit the job site and will prepare a final observation list of all the items on the project that shall be finished or corrected before the project can be accepted.
D. When the Contractor notifies the Architect that all items on the above final observation list have been completed and corrected, the Architect will visit the project to ascertain that all the items on the final observation list have been corrected and can be accepted.
E. Architect shall be paid by this Contractor for all other successive trips to the project that are made necessary because not all the items in the final observation list were corrected at the time of the second visit described above.
F. The Architect will charge the trips according to his current fee, including transportation and subsistence.
1.16 WARRANTIES A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified.
B. Provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one year(s) after Date of Acceptance. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates (include in O & M Manuals) for such materials or equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. Include dates of start and end of the warranty and manufacturer's representative name and telephone number.
C. This warranty will be superseded by warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for construction heating or cooling.
1.17 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Conduct demonstrations only after systems have been through start-up procedures, systems are complete and operating, and operating and maintenance data is complete.
B. Instruct the Owner's representatives on the proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. Include seasonal concerns and operations. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of instruction.
C. Systems: All mechanical systems listed in these specifications. See applicable sections of Division 23 for additional requirements.
D. Contractor's Representatives: 1. Contractor's representatives shall have a thorough knowledge of the particular installation.
23 0000-13 2. Manufacturer's representatives shall have a thorough understanding of each particular piece of equipment.
E. Scheduling: Arrange and schedule demonstration times with Architect.
F. Location: Conduct demonstrations at project including tours of systems.
G. Operating and Maintenance Data: Arrange for data to be at demonstrations. Include review of data at demonstrations.
H. Time Allotment: Provide demonstrations of adequate time periods, except as noted elsewhere, to ensure proper understanding of systems by Owner's representative.
I. Furnish ladders, tools, etc. as required to provide access to all equipment and controls for demonstrations.
1.18 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT START-UP A. General: Verify that: 1. Building enclosure is complete. 2. Excess building materials and debris have been removed. 3. Building is broom clean.
B. Inspect preceding work to ensure that: 1. Electrical: Verify with Division 26 contractor that: a) Temporary services are disconnected and permanent utility services are capable of full load. b) Connections in main switchgear and sub-panels are tight. c) Necessary tests and check meter readings have been made. d) Wiring to motors and controls required for operational smoke and fire protection code demonstrations are complete.
2. Mechanical: a) Specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems have been made. b) Operational and performance tests have been made. c) Each piece of equipment comprising a part of system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, proper control sequence, and any other condition which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel.
C. Start-Up and Testing: 1. Notify Architect at least two (2) days in advance of the start-up of mechanical systems. 2. Complete tests required by code authorities including smoke detection, fire protection and health codes. 3. Ensure that control systems are fully operational in automatic mode. 4. After test runs have been completed and systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory and ready for permanent operation, clean or replace permanent pipeline strainers, clean and recoat
23 0000-14 permanent filters, replace throwaway air filters with new, properly adjust valve and pump packings, adjust belt tensions, secure drive guards in place, check lubrication and replenish if required. 5. If systems are not to continue in use following the start-up procedures take steps to insure against accidental operation or operation by unauthorized personnel. 6. All refrigeration equipment, boilers, units specified with controls, and other equipment so specified shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. If a unit or piece of equipment is specified with factory controls to accomplish a sequence, it shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to verify that the specified sequence is being met. This verification shall be noted on the start-up log; coordinate with control contractor. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. 7. The contractor to adjust settings thru first year as required by Mechanical Engineer. 8. Balancing shall occur after the start-up procedures have been completed.
1.19 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Comply with Division 1.
B. Approval for final payment will not be given until the following items have been submitted and reviewed. Refer to other sections of these specification for specific requirements: 1. Project Record Drawings. 2. Record of Piping and Ductwork Tests. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Equipment Start-Up Logs. 5. Balance Report. 6. Keys for Mechanical Equipment, Panels, etc. 7. Spare Equipment or Material Parts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Applicable
END OF SECTION
23 0000-15 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included in this Section 1. Pipe Supports, Anchors and Seals 2. Motors and Starters 3. Valves 4. Pipe Installation 5. Supporting Steel 6. Vibration Isolation 7. Pipe and Ductwork Testing 8. Expansion Compensation 9. Flushing, Cleaning and Sterilizing
B. Furnish Only 1. Access Panels: For appropriate section for installation.
C. Related Sections may include but are not limited to the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-place Concrete." 4. Division 08 Section "Access Doors." 5. Division 22: All Sections. 6. Reference Standards and Codes: Comply with Section 23 000.
1.3 RELATED WORK A. Mechanical: Division 23 All Sections B. Plumbing: Division 22 All Sections C. Electrical: Division 26 All Sections
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications Welders shall be qualified per ANSI/ASME B31.9 Building Service Piping for the type of work being performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment in each of the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available thru one manufacturer (or vendor) for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner.
1. Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage)
23 0500-1 2. Starters (Supplied by Boulder County, Installed by MC) 3. Pumps (Supplied by Boulder County, Installed by MC) 4. Thermometers 5. Pressure Gauges 6. Plug, Globe and Check Valves 7. Butterfly Valves (Individual valves not included in piping packages listed below) 8. Ball Valves (Individual valves not included in piping packages listed below) 9. Balancing Valves 10. Equipment Connection Piping Packages 11. Dielectric Unions 12. Strainers 13. Air Filters
2.2 MOTORS, PHASE PROTECTION AND STARTERS A. General 1. All motors, phase protection, starters and other electrical control equipment shall be listed per the requirements of the National Electric Code. 2. Submit motor, phase protection and starter shop drawing per Division 23 0000 and Division 01. 3. Motors incorporated into package equipment and defined as definite purpose motors are exempt from these requirements.
B. Motors 1. Furnish double shielded ball bearings in accordance with ANSI B3.16-1992 for 3/4 motors and larger, squirrel cage, open drip proof, copper windings, Class B or F insulation, 1800 and/or 1200 rpm, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors 1/2 HP or less may be split capacitor single phase with sleeve bearings and a standard frame size and rpm. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron or steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. a. Inverter Duty Motors (1) Motor supplied for use with Variable Frequency Drives shall be rated for inverter duty and must include a stainless steel nameplate showing 'Inverter Duty Motor'. (2) Nameplate shall also show that motor is suitable for variable torque operation on VFD power from 6 to 60Hz, and show rated torque in lb-ft on inverter power in addition to the standard nameplate data specified in NEMA standards. (3) Motor manufacturer shall supply certification that motor includes an 'inverter grade' insulation system using not less than triple insulation layer wire and other features necessary to the voltage spike specifications of NEMA MG1-31.40.4.2.
23 0500-2 Motors shall also have a high rigidity stator core treatment. (4) Motor insulation shall be an "Inverter Grade" system designed to meet the voltage spike limits defined by NEMA MG1-1993, part 31.40.4.2. Insulation systems must use triple layer magnet wire or must use magnet wire which has a Pulse Endurance Index (PEI) greater than 50. Insulation systems utilizing heavy film and two film wire with a Pulse Endurance Index less than 50 are not acceptable. Complete insulation of the slot, cell and phase groups is required. The system shall be rated for class F rise or better. (5) Inverter Duty stator core designs shall be of high rigidity type with reinforced end turn construction to minimize mechanical fatigue of the winding, and to reduce resonant noise. Single dip and bake cycles are not acceptable. (6) Motor manufacturer shall supply certification with submittals that the motor is constructed to meet all requirements of NEMA MG1-1993, part 31. (7) Rotor cores and/or assemblies shall be of low vibration design that meets 1/2 of the NEMA MG1 recommended levels for balance. (8) Inverter duty motors shall include a normally closed winding over temperature thermostat suitable to be wired to the VFD panel for drive shutdown. (9) Refer to Section 23 3000 for VFD requirements.
2. Where commercially available, motors rated greater than 5 HP shall have a power factor of not less than 90 percent under rated load conditions. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. Motors shall have 1.15 service factor at altitude. 3. Motors, starters and other electrical control equipment in moist areas or special conditions, such as explosion proof, shall be designed and approved for installation in such areas. See schedules on drawings and equipment specifications for starter type. 4. Motor wiring shall terminate in a NEMA terminal box mounted on the motor case and shall be of the manufacturer's standard size. The terminal box shall have a bolt type copper ground connector. 5. All general purpose motors shall have minimum full-load nominal efficiencies as listed in the following table:
23 0500-3 NEMA Premium Efficiency Motors ODP TEFC RPM 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600 Motor Horsepower 1 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 30 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 40 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 60 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 75 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 125 95.0 95.4 94.1 95.0 94.5 95.0
Motor efficiencies shall be tested in accordance with procedures specified in NEMA MG1-1987 and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Nominal full-load efficiency shall be listed on the electric motor's nameplate.
C. Starters (Supplied by Boulder County, installed by MC) 1. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. Starters shall be built and sized in accordance with NEMA Standards for industrial control except no contactors shall be smaller than NEMA Size 1. Indoor starters shall be provided with a NEMA 1 enclosure. Outdoor starters shall be provided with a NEMA 3R (gasketed) or NEMA 4 enclosure. All three phase starters to have a trip-free, thermal overload relay in each ungrounded phase conductor. Thermal overload relays shall be block type with an adjustable dial to set to exact motor full load amps. Overloads shall be factory calibrated as a unit and shall be ambient compensated. Relays shall be manual reset type and shall meet NEMA Class 10 tripping characteristics. Differential single phasing protection shall be provided in the thermal overload relay. Furnish hand-off-auto switches and green running pilot light (6 volt transformer type bulb) in starter cover. 2. Provide integral transformer with secondary fuse and 120 volt control circuit on all starters which are furnished with control circuits. Transformer shall be mounted and factory wired in the starter enclosure. Control circuits shall be de-energized whenever the operating power supply to the particular equipment is disconnected. Also provide auxiliary contacts required for system operation plus one spare (minimum of one normally open contact and one normally closed contact required). Installation of additional auxiliary contacts shall be accomplished without having to remove starter from its enclosure. Coordinate actual number and type of contacts
23 0500-4 required for each starter with Division 23 0900. 3. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 6. Starters are Cutler-Hammer and are supplied by Boulder County 7. Provide starters for 3/4 HP motors and larger, unless specifically noted.
D. Furnish a phase monitor control relay (Time Mark Model 257 or Wagner Model WPC-800) on all motors 5 HP and larger. Phase monitor control relay shall protect against phase reversal, phase loss, phase unbalance, and phase under voltage.
2.3 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron or steel sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves, dynamically balanced and keyed.
Single groove (or greater as necessitated by torque requirements) variable and adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment shall be used for motors 15 HP and below; selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Two groove (minimum) fixed pitch sheaves shall be used for 20 HP and above and be bushed type.
B. Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor horsepower.
C. Consulting Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to direct speed changes as required (at no cost) if in his/her opinion these are warranted after final balancing. This includes fixed sheave replacement.
2.4 ACCESS DOORS Furnish access doors where indicated and at locations where required for access to concealed valves, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, and equipment servicing. Access doors shall be flush mounted, hinged steel aluminum doors and frames suitable for surface in which they are mounted. Doors shall be provided with primer suitable for finish painting. Non-rated doors shall have slot screwdriver type catch. If doors are installed in fire rated surfaces, they shall carry proper rating and be self-closing and latching. Zurn Acudor or equivalent. Access doors and panels in ductwork, air handling units, sheet metal plenums are specified in Section 23 3000.
2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. General 1. Use adjustable pipe hangers on suspended pipe. Chain or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Provide hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Maximum Minimum Hanger Pipe Type Pipe Size Spacing Rod Size Steel Pipe 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 3/4” through 1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2” and 2" 10'-0" 3/8"
23 0500-5 2-1/2” through 3" 10'-0" 1/2" 4” and 5" 10'-0" 5/8"
Copper Pipe 1/2" through 1-1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 2” and above 10'-0" 3/8"
2. See Vibration Isolation, this section, for special hangers. 3. Hanger rods shall be continuous threaded steel. Rods may be reduced one size for double rod hangers with 3/8" as a minimum diameter.
B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping shall be copper plated or plastic coated steel, adjustable swivel ring hangers. 2. Individual hangers for un-insulated steel and insulated steel or copper piping shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers for pipe sizes up through 1-1/2" and wrought steel, adjustable clevis hangers for pipe sizes 2" and over.
C. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000 or equivalent by B-Line or Superstrut. System shall be selected to support five times the weight or thrust applied without failure. Where trapeze length exceeds four feet, provide additional hanger rod at mid span. Hangers shall be spaced for smallest pipe in group. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe shall have standard pipe clamps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe shall rest on neoprene sleeves or 3M Scotch Rap 50 applied to a 50 mil thickness extended 1/2" beyond clamp edge and have standard pipe clamps at each support. 4. All insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall have standard pipe straps over the high density insulation inserts at each support.
D. Insulated Pipe Supports Where individual hangers are used protect all insulated pipe at point of support with a 360 or 180 degree insulation insert of high density polyurethane foam, water-proofed 140 psi calcium silicate, or expanded perlite. Adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A, flame spread 10/smoke 0. Provide minimum G-60 galvanized shield for high density insert. Where trapeze hangers are used, protect all insulated pipe at point of support with 360 degree insulating insert. Encase insulation in a 360 degree sheet metal shield. Where insulation stops and starts for pipe clamps, ends of insulation shall be sealed with liquid mastic to provide continuous vapor barrier. Insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and be divided into longitudinal half sections as applicable and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Insulation insert for all cold liquid (60 0F or below) shall extend 1 inch beyond sheet metal shield on each end. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges shown in chart below. When pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10 ft., and for all pipe roller applications, utilize a double layer shield.
Pipe Size Shield Length Minimum Gauge
23 0500-6
1/2” through 1-1/2" 4" 22 2” through 6" 6" 20
E. Wall Supports 1. 1/2” through 3" - Cast iron hook 2. 4” and Over - Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 3. Unistrut may be used for multiple pipe runs up to 3" in size
F. Vertical Supports 1. Provide friction riser clamps, supported and braced. Clamps for copper piping shall be plastic coated steel. Copper pipes shall be wrapped in 3M Scotch Rap 50 applied to a 50 mil thickness extended 1/2" beyond clamp edge. a. Screwed Pipe: Support at 10 foot on center for 2 inch and larger and 8 foot on center for smaller than 2 inch pipe. b. Copper Tubing: Support at 8 foot on center for 2 inch and larger and 6 foot on center for smaller than 2 inch pipe.
2.6 SLEEVES A. Schedule 40 steel pipe (galvanized if used below grade or in outside wall) or plastic sleeves manufactured by PSI/Thunderline sized large enough to allow for movement and for continuous insulation. Sheet metal sleeves are not allowed. Sleeves used below grade and for penetration of water proofed walls shall contain integral water stop. Seal space between pipe and sleeve with Link Seal compressible linked rubber seals.
B. In addition to schedule 40 sleeves, prefabricated fire rated Through Penetration Fire Stop Devices and Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems for each specified and particular piping or conduit material for fire rated penetrations shall be allowed. System shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems or Approved Equivalent.
2.7 VALVES A. General 1. HVAC electronic control valves will be supplied by Boulder County and installed by MC. 2. All valves of a given type shall be of one manufacturer and shall be listed with the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Pressure Ratings Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for minimum 125 psig at 450 oF and 200 psig at 250 oF.
C. Valve Connections 1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. 2. Thread pipe sizes two inches and smaller. 3. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. 4. Solder or screw to solder adaptors for copper tubing.
23 0500-7 5. Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service.
D. Valve Operators 1. Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe or angle and drain valves. 2. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sizes 2" and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sizes 2-1/2" and larger with a wrench with set screw. 3. Provide chain operators for valves four inches and larger located more than 7 feet from floor in equipment rooms. Extend chains to five feet from floor and hook to clips arranged to clear aisles. 4. Provide adjustable memory stops for all valves used in balancing service.
2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Neoprene Pads: Mason Spec Pads Neoprene pads shall be either ribbed or waffle patterned in-shear pads. All pads shall be true in-shear pads using alternately higher and lower ribs to provide effective vibration isolation, and shall be molded using oil resistant compounds.
Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. MSW Kinetics Noise Control NPD
B. Neoprene Mount: Mason Spec A Double deflection neoprene mounts shall be molded from oil resistant compounds, with neoprene covered steel load transfer plate for bolting to supported equipment, and a neoprene covered bolt-down plate with holes provided for anchoring to supporting structure. There shall be friction pads on both the top and the bottom of the mounting. Provide deflection ratings as noted in schedule. Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. ND Kinetics Noise Control RD
C. Spring Mount: Mason Spec B or D Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4"(6mm) neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Installed and operating heights shall be equal. The ratio of the spring diameter divided by the compressed spring height shall be no less than 0.8. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Units could need housing, and frames as required by applications.
Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. SLF/SLR Kinetics Noise Control FSD
23 0500-8
D. Air Mount: Mason Spec C or E (Chiller) Multiple bellow air springs shall be manufactured with powder coated upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable, flexible Nylon reinforced Neoprene element to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Burst pressure must be a minimum of 3 times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be equipped with 3 leveling valves connected to the building control air or a supplementary air supply to maintain elevation plus or minus 1/8"(3mm). Air Spring Compressor Electric 1HP plug-in oil less air compressor and 4 gallon tank with built-in pressure switch, and neoprene pad legs, Wilkerson Desiccant Dryer, Wilkerson 5 micron filter and Wilkerson Pressure Regulator 10 psi to 100 psi.
Submittals shall include natural frequency, as well as load and damping tests, all as performed by an independent lab or acoustician.
Manufacturer Springs Leveling Valves Mason Industries, Inc. MT LV
E. Spring Hanger: Mason Spec F, G and H Hanger shall consist of rigid steel frames with 0.35” deflection neoprene elements at the top, a steel spring mounting specification B and reinforced neoprene cup at the bottom all isolated to prevent vibration. Provide stops with hangers for installation or connection to duct straps as required by installation.
Manufacturer Mason Industries Inc. 30N/PC30N/W30N Kinetics Noise Control.
F. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Flexible stainless steel annular hose with stainless steel braid or bronze hose and braid. Male nipples shall be used for piping size 2 inches and less. Pipe sizes 2-½ inches and larger shall be flanged (150# ASA). Copper couplings shall have sweat fittings.
Manufacturer Screwed Flanged Sweat Masons MN-PC FFL-PC CPS-PC Flex-Weld/Keflex KSSPC-MPT KSSPC-FLG - Hyspan 4505 4502 4507 Metraflex SST MM BBS Streamflo SPCT SPCF - Thermo Tech Flex/Flo F/F/N F/F/F F/F/C
G. Flexible Equipment Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be manufactured of E.P.D.M. reinforced with nylon. No steel rings or wire shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Connectors size 2 inch and less to have threaded ends with female unions. Connectors size 2-1/2 inch and larger shall have floating
23 0500-9 flanges recessed to lock the connector's raised face neoprene flanges. Connectors shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 220 oF. When pressures will cause the connector to extend beyond its rated elongation, control cables shall be employed with end fittings isolated by means of 1/2" thick bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi.
Manufacturer Screwed Flanged Elbow Mason SFU SFDEJ - C-Flex TU TF - Flex-Weld/Keflex K500N KTWNNF - Metraflex Dbl.Sphere Union Dbl. Sphere EL Sphere Steamflo AMU AMT - Thermo Tech Flex/Flo F/F/Union F/F/DS - Kinetics Noise Control UTC FTC Kinflex
H. Spring Isolation Curbs: Mason Spec N The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating floor section. The lower member shall be designed for a flat roof. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind forces. Curb shall have internal stabilizers to provide wind resistance with a minimum clearance of 1/4"(6mm) so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4"(6mm) thick neoprene acoustical pads. Minimum spring deflection shall be 2” . Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers.
The floating member of the roof curb shall have a perimeter angle cross members to support four layers of 5/8” waterproof sheetrock laid on with staggered joints.
Submittals shall include all curb dimensions, weight, spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details.
MUA-3 Mason Industries RCS, Kinetics Noise Control ESR with four layers of 5/8 sheetrock.
RTU-1 Mason Industries RCS, Kinetics, Kinetic Noise Control ESR with 30" Plenum Curb on 6" concrete base under entire unit.
I. Inertia Bases: Mason Spec L Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating concrete bases. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction and discharge elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6"(150mm). The base depth need not exceed 12"(300mm) unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall
23 0500-10 include welded and tied reinforcing bars. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchor bolts while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1"(25mm) clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable.
Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. BMK or K Kinetics Noise Control CIB
2.9 EXPANSION COMPENSATION A. Expansion Loops: Flexible expansion loops shall consist of two sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and a 180 degree return assembly with drain and support bracket. Flexible expansion loops shall impart no thrust loads to system support anchors or building structure. Flexible hose and braid shall be stainless steel or bronze. Materials of construction and type of end fitting shall be consistent with pipe material and equipment/pipe connection fittings. Assembly shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi at 200 °F operating temperature.
Manufacturer Screwed Flanged Sweat Thermo Tech - FPO - Metraflex MLT MLF MLS
2.10 FLANGE GASKETS Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials as noted below. As applicable due to service, gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21.11, B16.20 or B16.21.
Service Acceptable Materials (Pressure/Temperature Rating) Heating water and chilled PTFE (1200 psig @ 500 °F) water (with and without glycol)
Gaskets shall be as manufactured by Garlock, Frenzelit, Vellumoid or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION Inspect preceding work in accordance with Section 23 0000.
3.2 MOTORS, PHASE PROTECTION AND STARTERS A. Motors: Provide capacitors to correct motor power factor to at least 90 percent where motor has a power factor less than 90 percent. B. Phase Protection: Phase protection shall be included within starter enclosure unless starter is part of packaged equipment. On packaged equipment, if phase monitor control relay(s) are not provided with equipment, provide these relay(s) and install within
23 0500-11 equipment electrical compartment or in seperate NEMA enclosure attached to equipment. Include all wiring, conduit, disconnects, etc., per Division 26 sections.
3.3 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements Base final installation of materials and equipment on job site dimensions and conditions. Job site dimensions shall take precedence over Drawing dimensions. Field measure critical dimensions and do not fabricate or cut materials to length until such measurements are made. Be responsible for accurate location of rough-ins as required for equipment being serviced.
B. Cleaning Ream pipes and tubes. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside before joining, leaving ready for painting or identification as required. All piping stored outdoors shall be flushed of debris before installation.
3.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Neoprene Pads 1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide on all floor mounted equipment with motors not specified for another vibration method i.e. boilers, stands. 2. Where multiple pads are stacked, steel shims must be placed between pads per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Neoprene Mounts Mounts must be connected to equipment and floor per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Inertia Bases 1. Pour concrete into the inertia base frame provided per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Adjust springs so that there is a minimum 1” clearance below base when equipment has been installed and loaded for operation to permit the springs to operate as required to meet the deflection requirements listed in the schedule.
D. Air Mounts: Connect air supply to leveling valves and air springs as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Spring Isolation Curbs: 1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. The supply and return openings in the unit shall be extended down below the upper curb and flexible connections shall be installed for connection to distribution ductwork. The ductwork prior to the flexible connection shall be secured to the roof curb assemble per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. The electrical conduits, heating water and chilled water shall be connected to the rooftop unit as described in flexible pipe or flexible equipment connectors.
23 0500-12 4. Contractor to insulate the curb with 2" ridged closed cell flame retardant insulation. 5. Contractor to provide sheetrock installation where specified in the curb and seal edges seams and ducts. The acoustical material must surround duct to provide a continuous sound break. This acoustical layer shall be caulked to minimize sound transmission. 6. Contractor to provide and install plenum divider for installation where plenum curb is specified.
F. Equipment
1. Mount base mounted pumps on an inertia base. Each inertia base for base mounted pumps shall include supports for base elbows at the suction and discharge connections including suction diffuser if used. Where the concrete is "T" shaped, or other than rectangular, mounting shall be self contained concrete inserts with flush openings on the side of the foundation for spring adjustment or removal. 2. Support equipment by Mason Industries, Kinetics Noise Control, Amber/Booth vibration isolators, as follows: Table is Mason Engineering Equipment Specs and Deflection.
Slab on Grade Up to 30ft Up to 40ft Floor Span Floor Span b Pumps Close Coupled B – L -.75" B – L -.75" B – L-1.5" Large Inline (5hp & Up) B – L -.75 B – L-1.5" B – L-1.5" Base Mounted B – L -.75 B – L-1.5 B – L-1.5 c. Unit Heaters Suspended F -.75 F - .75 F - .75 e. Rooftop Units MUA-3 - N -.75 N -1.5 RTU-1 - N -1.5 N -2.5 f. Refrigeration Equipment Screw E – .75 E – .75 E – 75
3. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 4. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight, such as chillers and equipment exposed to wind shall be mounted on spring mountings but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. 5. Where required due to overall height restriction or where called for, provide height saving brackets to mount equipment.
G. Piping 1. Chillers and Rooftop Units a. Isolate all chilled water piping, connected to packaged chiller, from the structure throughout the equipment room by double deflection spring and neoprene hangers with 1" deflection. Hang piping so that it does not touch any part of the structure. Connect pipes to
23 0500-13 evaporator with flexible equipment connectors on equipment side of shut-off valves. b. Connect all heating water and chilled water piping to equipment supported by vibration isolators with flexible equipment connectors. c. Base Mounted Pumps: Connect piping to base mounted pumps with flexible equipment connectors on equipment side of shut-off valves.
3.5 SLEEVES, BOXES, AND CONCRETE CURBS A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is this Contractor's responsibility to accurately set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve.
B. Sleeves and boxes shall be provided wherever pipes and ducts pass through floor, wall and roof construction.
C. Each sleeve shall be utilized for only one pipe. Blockouts for multiple pipes or individual pipes are not allowed unless indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Architect.
D. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceilings. In areas where pipes are concealed (i.e. in chases), terminate sleeves 1/4" above finished floor. In areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeve 1/4" above finished floor, except in mechanical rooms and rooms containing floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 2" above finished floor.
E. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have 4" high concrete curb around duct, furnished and installed under Division 03. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate this requirement with appropriate trade.
F. Pipes passing through exterior wall shall be sealed water tight by using liquid sealant or compressible linked rubber seals.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING Be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching for work under Division 23 caused by improper coordination or notification. Comply with requirements of Division 01.
3.7 PIPE AND DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS A. Where horizontal ducts and pipe pass through walls and vertical ducts and pipes pass through floors or roofs seal off void between opening and duct, or pipe and sleeve. All penetrations of exterior wall below grade shall be sealed water tight. All penetrations of exterior walls above grade shall be sealed weather tight.
B. Wherever any pipe, duct, conduit, steel member, bracket, equipment or other material penetrates or passes through fire-resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with non-hardening caulk or other fire resistant material
23 0500-14 as approved by all authorities having jurisdiction. Embed sealing material full thickness of material being penetrated. Sealants used at penetrations of items which can be consumed in a fire shall be intumescent and shall be installed so as to fill the void left if penetrant is consumed. Sealants to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E-814 and classified by Walrock Hersey.
3.8 FLASHINGS A. All flashings will be done under roofing division except as noted or detailed elsewhere in these specifications.
3.9 PUMP AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Where the suction or discharge of any pump, inlet or outlet of terminal equipment, or inlet or outlet of heating or cooling generation equipment is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings.
3.10 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Installation 1. Install piping without springing or forcing, and to clear windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted. 2. Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops and devices necessary to permit free expansion and contraction without causing undue stresses. Also see Expansion Compensation this section. Make changes in direction with fittings. Support piping independently at equipment so its weight will not be supported by the equipment. 3. Install vertical risers plumb and straight, horizontal lines parallel with walls and partitions. Conceal piping above ceilings and within furring and walls unless otherwise indicated. 4. All piping shall be run full size as indicated on drawings. Any reductions in piping required by equipment connections shall be made at these connection points.
B. Clearance Provide clearance for proper installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and unions. Provide minimum 1/2 inch clearance between pipes after insulation.
C. Shut-Off Valves & Unions 1. Where indicated, provide shut-off valves and unions suitably located, to isolate each item of equipment, branch circuit or section of piping. 2. Provide dielectric unions at junctions of dissimilar metals.
D. Routes and Grades 1. Route piping in general locations indicated, in an orderly manner and to maintain required grades. Coordinate with other piping, conduits, ducts and equipment making necessary offsets to accommodate the same. 2. Install piping to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with use of available space. Group piping wherever possible at common
23 0500-15 elevations. Install concealed pipes close to the building structure to keep furring to a minimum.
3.11 WELDING A. General 1. Piping shall comply with the provisions of the latest revisions of the applicable sections of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.9 Building Service Piping. 2. Boiler external piping shall comply with the latest revision of Section 1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, ANSI/ASME BPV-1 Power Boilers.
B. Before any welding is performed, the contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a copy of his Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Before any welder shall perform any welding, the contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding Operator Qualification Tests as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
D. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
E. Submit to the Architect a written report of examination results. Report shall include all welds listing the type of weld, the limitations or imperfections which were examined, whether or not weld meets acceptance criteria, examination method, and name of person implementing the examination.
F. Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his organization and shall repair or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications.
G. Provide backing rings on all pipe 2-1/2" and larger that are welded with welding rods. Welds made with a wire feed welder do not required backing rings.
3.12 INSTALLATION PIPE HANGERS A. Adequately support piping from the building structure with adjustable hangers to maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying.
A. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.
C Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches minimum after piping is erected.
23 0500-16 D. Insulation shall be carried full size through the hangers.
3.13 VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Provide drain valves at main shut off valves, low points of piping and equipment.
C. Control Valve Piping If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings.
3.14 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. Access door assembly to be minimum size of 24" x 24".
B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required (minimum 24" x 24") to provide adequate access for service or replacement of components.
C. Furnish all access doors to the General Contractor for installation by trade responsible for surface in which installed. Provide instructions for location.
3.15 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. General Furnish and install, as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement.
B. Supporting Steel Provide supporting steel not indicated on the Structural Drawings for equipment requiring same. Fabricate supports in accordance with AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
C. Housekeeping Bases Concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment including anchor bolts and inserts are installed under Division 03 in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by the contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Bases shall be 4 inches in height and over the complete floor area of the equipment. The bases shall be located and sizes determined by the contractor furnishing the equipment.
3.16 DRIP PANS AND DRAIN PANS A. Provide drip pans or drain pans under piping containing liquids or equipment where indicated.
23 0500-17
B. Pans: 18 gauge galvanized iron. Pans shall be two inch deep, with rolled top edges, and shall extend six inches each side of the pipe, group of pipes or equipment. Keep pans as close to the underside of the pipes or equipment as practicable. Seams shall be soldered, and pans shall be cross braced as required to prevent sagging and warping.
C. Pitch each pan to a drain connection, for complete drainage and pipe a 3/4 inch or larger copper tube drain to discharge over nearest available open drain.
3.17 PAINTING Supporting steel shall receive one coat of primer paint in the shop after fabrication welding is complete, as specified in Division 05. Paint field joints with one coat of matching primer. Finish painting under Division 09.
3.18 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION See Section 23 0553.
3.19 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install nickel-plated floor, wall and ceiling escutcheons of adjustable type on pipes passing through walls; floor or ceiling in finished areas after painting is completed.
B. Install 20 gauge flange around ducts passing through walls, floor or ceilings in finished areas.
3.20 PIPE AND DUCTWORK TESTING A. General 1. Test piping and ductwork systems prior to concealment. Ensure that the test pressure which might damage fixtures or equipment does not reach such units by valving them off or otherwise isolating them during the test. Keep written field records of all tests. Each record shall contain, as a minimum, the date of the test, system or subsystem tested, test medium and pressure, duration of test, test results, name and signature of individual performing test, and the name and signature of witness to the test who is not an employee of the firm performing the test. Submit copies of all tests to Architect. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative and local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. Furnish all instruments required for testing. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six (6) hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours without loss of pressure. Any visible leakage or appreciable pressure drop during the test will be cause for rejecting the test. Additional tests will be required after corrective measures have been taken until satisfactory results are obtained. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all plugs, piping, valves, hoses and pumps necessary for the required tests and for proper disposal of the water upon completion of the tests. 2. Test all heating water and chilled water piping, before connecting to units, at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 3. Test all glycol filled water lines at 200 psig hydrostatic pressure. 4. Test all ductwork from supply fan to terminal boxes before ducts are concealed and before terminal boxes are connected. All openings shall be
23 0500-18 capped off and partial sections of the duct shall be tested using a fan capable of developing 8" S.P. Use U-gauge manometer to record duct S.P. and orifice pressure differential manometer to record cfm leakage. Repair leaks until total leakage from source to last terminal box mounted does not exceed 2% of total air flow. If leaks cannot be detected and leakage is greater than 2% of total air flow, then smoke shall be used to aid in determining duct leak locations.
3.21 FLUSHING AND CLEANING A. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, all piping except as individually noted below, shall be blown out with air and then completely washed out with cleaning compounds compatible with final fluid to avoid contamination. The systems shall then be flushed for the complete removal of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc., required for this purpose. Chemicals used in the pipe cleaning as well as all chemicals used for water treatment shall be chemically compatible with all elements of the piping system in particular the flange gasket material.
B. Clean the boilers by the same procedure.
3.22 EXPANSION COMPENSATION A. General 1. Provide structural work and equipment required controlling expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints and provide specified expansion joints where indicated or required. 2. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure at points indicated and provide pipe guides so movement takes place along axis of pipe only.
B. Expansion Loops: Provide expansion loops and offsets where indicated. Fabricate loops and offsets with long turn factory-made welding fittings or long turn copper fittings and size to limit fitting stress to values recommended by the manufacturer or the Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1. Expansion loops not sized on Drawings shall be sized for the total pipe expansion without cold springing, but shall be field cold sprung one-half the pipe expansion corrected for ambient temperature.
C. Anchors: Securely anchor piping where indicated or where required for a proper installation and to force the pipe expansion in the proper direction. Anchors shall be suitable for the location of installation and shall be designed to withstand not less than five times the anchor load. Anchor vertical pipes by means of clamps welded around pipes and secured to wall or floor construction.
D. Pipe Guides: Install pipe guides properly spaced as recommended by the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association for proper installation in conjunction expansion loops. Use of guides with expansion loops shall be limited to points required to prevent buckling of pipe. Pipe guides shall not be used as pipe supports. Guides shall be factory-made cast semi-steel or other heavy fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider bolted or welded tight to the pipe. Guide and spider shall be factory insulated if used with insulated pipe and long enough to prevent
23 0500-19 over travel of spider and cylinder. Guides shall be of manufacturer's standard length and spiders shall be not less than the following:
Pipe Size Spider Length Inches Inches 1-1/2" and smaller 2" 2" to 3" 2-1/2" 4" 3"
END OF SECTION
23 0500-20 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and Install 1. Markers, tags and labels for mechanical pipes and equipment. 2. Pipe identification and flow indications. 3. Valve tags
B. Related Requirements 1. Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Requirements." 2. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."
1.3 REFERENCES Comply with ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Markers: Identify the contents of the various piping systems. Flow arrows shall clearly indicate the direction of flow. Utilize either of the following methods: 1. Pressure Sensitive Markers: Bradley Type B-350 or B-946, Seton, MSI, Craftmark or equivalent flexible film identification markers and tape, with legend size, color coding, and marker length per ANSI A13.1. 2. Stenciled Markings: Of size and color per ANSI A13.1, using clear cut stencils and oil base paint.
B. Tags: Brass or color coded anodized aluminum 1-1/2 inch diameter with edges ground smooth. Punch each tag to receive tie wires. Evenly space and stamp letters (1/4 inch high) and numbers (7/16 inch high) into the metal surface, with black letters.
C. Labels: White plastic laminate with black engraving, fastened with brass screws. Pressure-sensitive embossed labels (Dymo Type) are not acceptable. Provide labels of uniform size. Label all equipment unless a manufacturer's label is firmly attached.
2.2 STENCILS A. Stencils or Pressure Sensitive Markers 1. Conform to the following Schedule:
Outside Diameter of Length of Minimum Size Letter Pipe or Pipe Insulation Color Field 1/2" 8" 3/8"
23 0553-1 3/4" through 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" and 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" through 6" 12" 1-1/4" Ductwork and equipment - 2-1/2"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. General 1. Identify piping in above ceilings, etc. as well as exposed to view except piping in finished areas. Provide identifying markings at valves, fittings, and equipment, at terminal points, at each branch and riser take-off, on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and at both sides of piping passing through walls, ceilings, and floors. In addition, provide identifying markings at 30 feet o.c. for exposed piping and concealed piping. 2. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 3. For pipes under 1/2" O.D. color coded identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 4. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. 5. Apply directional flow arrows adjacent to each pipe mark.
B. Pressure Sensitive Markers Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Marker adhesion will be tested for permanence. Replace any markers showing dogears, bubbles or other failings.
C. Stenciled Markings Apply after completion of finished coat of paint. Wipe pipe clean. Perform stenciled on markings without overspray, drips or other imperfections. Provide dark background when using light colored stencils on light coverings (i.e. provide black background if using yellow stencil on white covering).
D. Markers and Markings 1. Use an arrow marker with each pipe content marking. The arrow shall always point away from the pipe marking and in the direction of flow; color and height of arrow to be same as content marking. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow. 2. Apply pipe and arrow marking within three inches of each valve to show proper identification of pipe contents and direction of flow. 3. Apply the marking to the pipe so lettering is in the most legible position. For overhead piping, apply marking on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, so marking can be read from floor level.
3.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all valves and cocks including fire protection valves, in main and branch piping located inside the building. Use tags secured with brass 'S' hooks, brass jack chains or bead chains.
23 0553-2
B. Stamp valve tags with a unique prefix to indicate system, followed by a number. (Example: CW-1; CW-2; HW-1; etc.). In general, the prefix shall match the system abbreviation used on the Drawings.
C. Provide a typewritten list of valves including: valve identification number, location, function, normal position, service and area served. Mount list under glass as directed. Include additional copies in the operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Show valve tag designations on the Project Record Document Drawings and on schematic flow diagrams.
3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Controls: Stencil or label magnetic starters and relays to identify connecting or controlled equipment. Stencil or label manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal overload switches which have not been specified as furnished with indexed faceplates as to "connected" or "controlled" equipment. Stencil or label automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, relays and starters.
B. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zone(s) served. Stencil or label base mounted pumps. Tags secured by tie wire may be used on small in-line pumps.
C. Fans: Stencil or label supply and exhaust fans and air handling units and connecting ductwork supplying one or more areas from an equipment room or isolated crawl or furred space as to drawing code number, service and areas of zones served.
D. Air Conditioning Equipment: Identify air conditioning equipment such as chillers, pumps, etc. by stencils or system nameplates. When more than one piece of like equipment is installed, they shall be identified as to area or space served.
E. VAV Boxes: Mount plastic label to ceiling grid (with VAV box designation) at VAV box location(s). Label to be same width as grid.
END OF SECTION
23 0553-3 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems including but not limited to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be the responsibility of Boulder County Architects and Facilities Division.
1.3 RELATED WORK A. Related work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Requirements." 2. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." 3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping and Pumps." 4. Division 23 HVAC, All Sections. 5. Division 23, Integrated Automation, All Sections.
1.4 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE - 1987 Systems Handbook: Chapter 57, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
B. ASHRAE - Standard 111 - 1988 Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
D. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.
E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
F. Sheet Metal Industry - Certification of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Technicians.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STATUS OF SYSTEMS A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the systems have been completed and are in full working order.
B. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full
23 0593-1 operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary testing, adjusting and balancing requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of available plans and specifications for the project. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that they are being installed properly for the need.
C. Before any air or hydronic balance work is done, the system(s) shall be checked for the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 3. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. (Verify that the filters are changed by the Mechanical Contractor if they are dirty.) 5. Ductwork systems are clean of debris. 6. Proper fan rotation. 7. Excessive equipment vibration. 8. All volume, fire and smoke dampers are in place and wide opened. 9. All return air paths are not obstructed (i.e. walls to structure). 10. Coil fins are cleaned and combed. 11. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 12. Air outlets are installed and connected. 13. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled and vented. 14. Proper pump rotation. 15. Strainer baskets are clean and in place. 16. Service and balance valves are open. 17. Proper control valve installation and operation. 18. Proper system static pressure to assure a full system. 19. Proper flow meter and check valve installation.
D. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.
E. Promptly report defects or deficiencies noted during balance or abnormal conditions in the mechanical system, which prevent system balance to the appropriate responsible person. Make special note of any discrepancy between tabulated conditions and specified conditions including, but not limited to, missing items, non-functioning items, items without final connections, etc., and call to the pertinent Contractor's and the Consulting Mechanical Engineer's attention. Rebalance and retabulate information as required by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer to provide a properly performing building.
F. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting and balancing. Make instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
23 0593-2 A. Adjust and balance all air and water systems within +10% to -5% of design flow rates. Check, adjust and balance all systems to meet the design conditions and tabulate all information on acceptable forms. All systems shall be checked for proper performance during design conditions, both heating and cooling.
B. Recorded data shall represent actual measured or observed condition. Affinity or fan law conversion to obtain readings is not allowable.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock all memory stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors or covers to electrical switch boxes, plugging test holes in ductwork where readings were taken and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
3.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Inspect all temperature control systems for proper sequence of operation, completeness and approximate calibration. Report any deficiencies to the responsible contractor immediately.
3.5 AIR BALANCE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. Measure air quantities at inlets and outlets.
B. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. 1. Adjust RPM on Belt Drive Fans: Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for predicted filter loading and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators. 2. Adjust RPM on Direct Drive Fans: a. For motors with speed taps, set fan speed on tap which most closely approaches design CFM. Report tap setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium or low. b. For motors with speed control rheostat, set output of fan at the design CFM by adjusting the rheostat. After adjustment, check the fan's ability to restart after shutdown. Increase setting as required for proper starting. Mark rheostat to indicate final setting position.
C. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers.
D. Make air quantity measurements for all mechanical air moving equipment in ducts by pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct to verify outlet readings
23 0593-3 and as a check for ductwork leakage. Pitot tube traverse shall be provided at all ducted exhaust fan inlets. If pitot tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet.
E. Adjust air diffusion patterns to obtain uniform space temperatures and to minimize objectional drafts and noise. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities.
F. Measure static pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter, coil and other equipment pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for loading of filters and indicate this on the final report.
G. The supply fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and the control contractor if the systems have fan volume control dampers or variable frequency drives (VFD). The duct static shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the balancing contractor. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design delivery. Inlet or outlet fan volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed. For VFD installations, the fan speed (by sheaves) shall be set so that the VFD can increase fan speed to account for filter loading.
H. Adjust outside air, return air and exhaust air automatic dampers for design conditions. Adjust and record percent outside air under minimum damper position. (Adjustment of minimum outside air on percent of damper actuator position is not acceptable.)
I. Systems with economizer dampers shall have data recorded during 100% open outside air mode, 100% return air mode, and 50% open outside and return air mode.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air and exhaust air dampers under open and closed conditions to check leakage.
K. Measure building static pressure and adjust outside, return and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries. Coordinate with Temperature Control Contractor to make system adjustments if pressure is controlled thru temperature control system.
L. Adjust all terminal variable volume boxes as follows: 1. For shutoff VAV boxes or constant volume boxes set the regulators to provide design minimum and maximum CFM. Adjust thermostat to assure proper damper operation. 2. For VAV or constant volume boxes with reheat, set the regulators to provide design minimum and maximum CFM. Check control sequence operation to assure proper sequencing.
3.6 HYDRONIC BALANCE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
23 0593-4 B. Hydronic Systems with Meters. The system shall be balanced using calibrated valves or flow meters to determine flow rates. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the report: Flow meter or calibrated valve size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, valve settings on meters or valves with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes.
C. Hydronic Systems without meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure balance). The system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. On completion of the balance the following information shall be recorded in the report: Design entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop, final balance entering and leaving water temperature/pressure drop.
D. The hydronic system(s) shall be balanced being certain that the path to one terminal is fully open. Total system flow shall be adjusted at pump by restricting the discharge balance valve. Indicate final valve position on report.
E. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.
F. Balance system with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. Control valve bypass loops shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in either mode. Confirm in writing.
G. Adjustment of hydronic systems shall be by means of balancing valves or fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing.
H. Where available pump capacity is less than the total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to the other parts.
I. If after final balance has been completed, the system is noisy due to final valve settings, noisy valves shall be opened to decrease their noise to an acceptable level. Circuit which was left open, per Paragraph D above, shall be rechecked and recorded once system has been quieted down to determine if an adequate flow rate still remains.
3.7 MOTOR STARTERS AND THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS Furnish exchange and adjust thermals as required for proper motor protection on Mechanical Contractor furnished magnetic and manual starters. Check for correct sizing and notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies on Electrical Contractor furnished magnetic starters.
3.8 REPORT OF WORK A. This Contractor shall submit a minimum of four (4) bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least 7 days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include all operating data; a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the supervising engineer and affixed with
23 0593-5 his certification seal. Also include project altitude and any correction factors used in the calculations. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
B. A reduced set of contract document drawing indicating 'as-built' conditions shall be included in the report with all terminals (VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, etc.) and thermostat locations clearly marked and all equipment designated.
C. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the contractor and the engineer is complete, the balancing firm shall furnish bound reports which contain the following information. All information listed below shall be included in report unless written approval for deletion of items is agreed to by Mechanical Engineer prior to start of balancing. 1. Title Page including company name, address and telephone number; project name and location; project Architect; project Engineer; project Contractor; project altitude. 2. Instrument list including instrument, manufacturer, model, serial number, range, calibration date. 3. Electric Motor data including manufacturer, HP, voltage, phase, amperage (name plate, actual (in all operating modes), no load), service factor, efficiency, power factor, starter size (brand, model, enclosure type, installed thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters if different than installed). 4. Vee belt Drive data including identification/location, required driven RPM; driven sheave (diameter and RPM), belt (size and quality), motor sheave (diameter and RPM), center to center distance (maximum, minimum and final). 5. Air Moving Equipment data including location, manufacturer, model, supply air flow (specified and actual), return air flow (specified and actual), outside air flow (specified and actual), total static pressure (specified and actual), inlet pressure, discharge pressure, fan RPM, motor and V-belt drive information as previously mentioned. 6. Static pressure across each individual component of the system and the total system. 7. Exhaust Fan data including location, manufacturer, model, air flow (specified and actual), total static pressure (specified and actual), inlet pressure, discharge pressure, fan RPM, motor and V- belt drive information as previously mentioned, duct pitot tube traverse near inlet of all ducted fans. 8. Outside/Return Air data including identification/location, supply air flow (specified and actual), return air flow (specified and actual), minimum outside air flow (specified and actual), return air temperature, outside air temperature, mixed air temperature (specified and actual). 9. Air Terminal Device data including air terminal number, room number/location, terminal type, terminal size, area factor, design velocity, design air flow, test (final) velocity, test (final) air flow, percent of design air flow. Include summary sheet for each system showing total terminal air flow by outlet and required total system air flow.
23 0593-6 10. Terminal Unit data including manufacturer, type (constant, variable, reheat, identification/number, location, model, size, minimum static pressure, minimum air flow (specified and actual), maximum air flow (specified and actual), inlet static pressure, fan air quantity (specified and actual) on fan powered terminal units, motor data as previously mentioned on fan powered terminal units. 11. Duct Traverse data including system zone/branch, duct size, area, design velocity, design air flow, test velocity, test air flow, duct static pressure, air temperature, air correction factor. Reduced drawings included with balance report shall indicate all duct traverse locations. 12. Air Monitoring Station data including identification/location, system, size, area, design velocity, design air flow, test (final) velocity, test (final) air flow. 13. Total CFM (required and final) for each fan system, including ducted cabinet heaters, unit heaters, fan coils, etc. Compare equipment air volumes measured by duct traverse readings to air terminal summary sheets for each piece of equipment. 14. Pump data including identification/number, manufacturer, size/model, impeller, service, flow rate (specified and actual), pressure rise (specified and actual), discharge pressure (full-flow and no-flow), suction pressure (full-flow and no-flow), total operating head pressure, motor data as previously mentioned. Include manufacturer's pump curves in report. For installations where pumps are sequenced for lead/lag, operation provide lead pump (each pump) and lag pump (all pumps) operational information. This shall include flow rate, pressure rise, discharge pressure, total operating head, and all operating motor data for both pumps at all operating conditions. 15. Chiller data including identification/number, manufacturer, capacity, model, evaporator entering water temperature (specified and actual), evaporator leaving water temperature (specified and actual), evaporator pressure drop (specified and actual), evaporator water flow rate (specified and actual), motor amperage. Temperature readings are not required if flow rate measurements can be obtained. Mechanical Engineer may request these temperature readings if required for trouble shooting system. 16. Boiler data including water flow rate (specified and actual), entering and leaving water temperature, flue gas analysis (copy of manufacturer's analysis report), entering and leaving water pressures, motor data as previously mentioned (if applicable). Temperature readings are not required if flow rate measurements can be obtained. Mechanical Engineer may request these temperature readings if required for trouble shooting system. 17. Cooling Coil data including identification/number, location, service, manufacturer, air flow (specified and actual), entering air DB and WB temperatures (specified and actual), leaving air DB and WB temperatures (specified and actual), water flow (specified and actual), water pressure drop (specified and actual), entering water temperature (specified and actual), leaving water temperature (specified and actual), air pressure drop (specified and actual). Temperature readings are not required if flow rate measurements can be obtained. Mechanical Engineer may request these temperature readings if required for trouble shooting system.
23 0593-7
18. Heating Coil data including identification/number, location, service, manufacturer, air flow (specified and actual), water flow (specified and actual), water pressure drop (specified and actual), entering and leaving water temperatures (specified and actual), entering and leaving air temperatures (specified and actual), air pressure drop (specified and actual). Temperature readings are not required if flow rate measurements can be obtained. Mechanical Engineer may request these temperature readings if required for trouble shooting system. 19. Heat Release Equipment (i.e. unit heaters, cabinet heaters, finned tube radiation, etc.) data including identification/number, location, manufacturer, water flow (specified and actual), inlet and outlet water temperatures (specified and actual), inlet and outlet water pressures (specified and actual), motor data as previously mentioned (where applicable). Temperature readings are not required if flow rate measurements can be obtained. Mechanical Engineer may request these temperature readings if required for trouble shooting system. 20. Flow Measuring Station and Calibrated Balancing Valve data including identification, location, size, manufacturer, model, flow rate (specified and actual), pressure drop (specified and actual), station or valve calibrated setting.
3.9 COMPLETION SERVICES A. The balancing firm shall make any changes of fan belts and sheaves to obtain the required cfm and make other corrections to the systems for proper performance as requested by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer or Owner.
B. Final acceptance of the project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received. When deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer, the balancing firm shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the report quantities in the presence of the Owner or Engineer for verification purposes.
END OF SECTION
23 0593-8 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install: 1. Piping insulation, including valves, fittings and other piping accessories 2. Equipment insulation 3. External duct wrap
B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Requirements." 2. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." 3. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 4. Division 23 Section "HVAC Air Distribution."
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Flame/smoke rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed index of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories Inc. label or listing (UL 723), or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove that fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. 2. Exceptions: The following materials are exceptions to the flame/smoke rating requirements specified above: a. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts and equipment. b. Cork or treated wood inserts used between shields and piping at hangers on low-temperature piping.
3. Moisture resistance: Do not provide materials with flameproofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the effects of moisture or high humidity.
B. Codes and standards. Provide insulation conforming to the current editions of following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in accordance with the ASTM standards, including: a. C 167 Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal Insulations. b. C 195 Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
23 0700-1 c. C 335 Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation d. C 449 Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement e. C 533 Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation f. C 534 Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form g. C 547 Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation h. C 552 Cellular Glass Block Thermal Insulation i. C 553 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications j. C 592 Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type) k. C 612 Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation l. C 665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing m. C 921 Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketed Materials for Thermal Insulation n. C 1045 Standard Practice for Calculating Thermal Transmission Properties Under Steady State Conditions o. C 1338 Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facing. p. D 781 Method of Test for Puncture and Stiffness of Paperboard, Corrugated and Solid Fiberboard. q. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials r. E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Provide and install pipe and duct insulation in accordance with the following ASHRAE standard: a. 90.1 Energy Conservation in New Building Design (Current Edition)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with the following NFPA standards: a. 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems b. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (latest edition)
4. Underwriters laboratories a. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of mechanical insulation in accordance with Section 23 000. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, K-value, thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
23 0700-2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to the site in non-broken factory containers with manufacturer's stamp or labels affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products and manufacturer's density and thickness rating.
B. Storage and Handling: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Store in a warm, dry location. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage during and after installation. Repair or replace any insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Mason, Knauf, Armstrong, 3M and Imcoa insulation will considered equivalent and will be acceptable without prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Various codes are more restrictive on the use of certain products in plenums etc. This specification allows several methods of insulating valves, fittings, etc., but it is the contractor's and the manufacturer's responsibility to assure that the code authorities will approve any product to be installed on the project.
2.3 INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide insulation conforming with the referenced publications and the specified temperature ranges and densities, in pounds per cubic foot (pcf).
B. Exterior of insulation: Provide insulation with exterior surface that is cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling.
C. Physical changes: Provide insulation that shows no physical changes that adversely affect its qualities under normal use at the intended use temperature.
2.4 MATERIALS A. Pipe Insulation 1. Interior Use a. Fiberglass: One-piece molded three pound density fiberglass pipe insulation (ASTM C547, Class 2) with factory applied all-service jacket with self-sealing lap. Jacket color shall be white and suitable for painting with latex paints. Insulation shall be suitable for pipe temperatures from 0 to 850 degrees. Maximum k-value shall be
23 0700-3 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degrees at 75 degrees mean temperature (ASTM C335). Jacket shall provide a vapor barrier with a permeance of less than 0.02 perms/in (as tested by Procedure A of ASTM E96). Shall be tested in conformance with ASTM E84 and not exceed 25/50, UL 723 and NFPA 255. b. Flexible elastomeric: Flexible tubular closed-cell elastomeric tubing conforming to ASTM C 534, Type I. Insulation shall be suitable for pipe temperatures from -40 to 220 degrees. Maximum k-value shall be 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature (ASTM C177 or C518). Permeance shall be 0.20 perm/in or less (as tested by Procedure B of ASTM E96). Flame-spread/smoke- developed indices shall be 25/50 or less for thickness 1 inch or less. c. Flexible polyolefin: Flexible tubular closed-cell polyolefin tubing shall be suitable for pipe temperatures from -165 to 210 degrees. Maximum k-value shall be 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature (ASTM C177 or C335). Permeance shall be 0.05 perm/in. or less (ASTM E96). Flame-spread/smoke-developed indices shall be 25/50 or less for thickness 1 inch or less.
2. Exterior Use a. Fiberglass: Fiberglass pipe insulation for exterior use shall be the same as for interior use, except that the all-service jacket may be omitted where a vapor barrier is not required and replaced with a metal jacket installed according to Part 3 of this specification section. b. Flexible elastomeric and polyolefin: Insulation for exterior applications shall be the same as for interior use. Exterior protection shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Piping Accessories (Fittings, Unions, Etc.) Insulation 1. Pre-molded insulation sections: Pre-molded insulation sections shall meet the requirements for the adjacent insulation. 2. Tape a. All service jacket tape: Provide tape with pressure sensitive adhesive suitable for sealing all service jacket on chilled and dual temperature piping system. Tape shall provide a vapor barrier. b. PVC sealing tape: Provide PVC sealing tape with pressure sensitive adhesive suitable for use with pre-molded PVC insulation covers. Tape shall provide a vapor barrier. Tape shall be white and 10 mil thick.
3. Vapor barrier mastic: Mastic shall be a water-base product suitable for spraying or trowel application. Color shall be white. Water vapor permeance (ASTM E 398) shall be 3.0 perm at 1/16 in. dry film thickness new and 1.0 perm when aged. Surface temperature range shall be -20 to 200 degrees. 4. PVC jacketing and fitting covers: PVC fitting covers shall be used with fiberglass inserts or with fiberglass pipe insulation cut to the shape of the cover. Inserts shall meet the temperature requirements for fiberglass pipe
23 0700-4 insulation. Covers and jacketing shall meet the 25/50 flame and smoke developed ratings of ASTM E 84. Covers and jacketing shall be white, 20 mil thickness and be suitable for surface temperatures up to 150 degrees. Covers and jacketing used external to building shall be 30 mil thickness. 5. Metal jacket pipe and fitting covers shall be 0.016 thick aluminum or stainless steel. 6. Laminated Protective Jacketing: Provide 13 ply laminated jacketing with acrylic adhesive, in smooth white finish to cover all insulated piping, fittings for weather and moisture protection. 7. Vapor barrier coating: Provide white, flexible, fire resistive vapor barrier coating. Permeance shall be 0.05 perm at 0.055 in. dry film thickness. Coating shall be good for temperatures at coating of 0 to 150 degrees.
C. Equipment Insulation 1. Fiberglass: For equipment having surface temperatures between 0 and 450 degrees, provide fiberglass insulation board or blanket meeting ASTM C 612, 3 pcf density with a k-value of 0.23 Btu-in/hr sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature. Supply with all service jacket if other covering is not specified. For equipment having surface temperatures between 450 degrees and 850 degrees provide fiberglass insulation board specified for these temperatures. 2. Flexible elastomeric: For surface temperatures -40 degrees to 220 degrees, provide flexible elastomeric equipment insulation sheet, 1" thick conforming to ASTM C534, Class II (sheet). 3. Flexible Polyolefin: For surface temperatures -165 degrees to 210 degrees, provide flexible polyolefin equipment insulation sheet, 1" thick conforming to ASTM C534, Class II (Sheet).
D. Fiberglass Duct Wrap 1. Exposed Duct a. Rectangular duct: Fiberglass insulation board, 1-1/2" thick, 0.6 pcf density having an installed k-value of 0.23 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature. Supply with vapor barrier foil-scrim- kraft (FSK) jacket. Flame-spread/smoke developed indices shall be 25/50 or less. b. Round duct: Fiberglass duct wrap conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1, 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 pcf density having a k-value of 0.27 Btu- in/hr-sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature. Supply with vapor barrier foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) jacket. Flame-spread/smoke developed indices shall be 25/50 or less.
2. Concealed duct: Fiberglass duct wrap conforming to ASTM, C 553, Type 1, 1-1/2" thick, 1 pcf density, having a k-value of 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft/degree at 75 degrees mean temperature. Supply with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) jacket. Flame-spread/smoke developed indices shall be 25/50 or less. 3. Bonding adhesive: Provide bonding adhesive designed to adhere fiberglass insulation to metal ducts. Adhesive shall be nonflammable, fire- resistive and meet the requirements of NFPA 90A.
23 0700-5
4. Foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) tape: Provide tape with pressure sensitive adhesive and FSK backing suitable for use on FSK jackets. 5. Vapor barrier coating: Provide solvent-based vapor barrier coating for service temperatures from -20 to 200 degrees. Coating shall meet NFPA 90A requirements.
E. Insulation Accessories 1. General: Provide insulation accessories compatible with materials to which applied and suitable for the services. Provide insulation accessories that do not corrode, soften or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. 2. Adhesives, coatings, sealing compounds and protective finishes: Provide adhesives, coatings, sealing compounds, and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 3. Staples: Provide outward-clinching monel-metal type staples, 3/4 in nominal width. 4. Bands: Provide bands of galvanized steel, aluminum, brass or nickel copper alloy of 3/4 in. nominal width. Provide band thicknesses exclusive of coating not less than 0.005 in. for steel and nickel copper alloy, 0.007 in. for aluminum and 0.01 in. for brass. 5. Wire: Provide wire of 14 ga. nickel copper alloy or copper clad steel, 16 ga. stainless steel or 18 ga. soft annealed galvanized steel. 6. Fire stop sealant: Provide inorganic fire stop sealant having 1 hr., 2 hr. or 3 hr. rating as required by building penetration requirement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Inspection Inspect work in conformance with Section 23 0000.
B. Preparation All piping and ductwork systems shall be tested and have all leaks repaired prior to the application of the insulation. All surfaces shall be clean and dry; all foreign materials, such as rust, scale and dirt removed; and where specified, surfaces painted, prior to installing the insulation.
C. Workmanship 1. Furnish and install piping, ductwork and equipment insulation as specified herein. 2. Insulation shall be applied by experienced coverers per best trade practice and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed. Install insulation material with smooth and even surfaces. Butt edges firmly together. 3. Make insulation continuous through sleeves or openings in walls and floors, except when there is a required fire resistance rating. Where this occurs, fill the open space between the pipe or duct and the building opening with fire stop sealant. Carry insulation through hangers, including trapeze hangers. Butt insulation tight to high density inserts (Section 23 0500) at
23 0700-6 hanger locations and secure by taping insulation to inserts. Where pipe supports for vertical riser clamps and anchors must be rigidly secured to pipe, cut insulation around support, fill void around support with insulation cement and cover with vapor barrier mastic. 4. Make sure that covering material which is to be painted will be in satisfactory condition to receive paint. 5. Ductwork insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, latest edition. 6. Cover all exposed and leading edges of insulation with adhesive.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Heating Hot Water Piping 1. General a. Unless otherwise specified, insulate all heating hot water piping. b. No vapor barrier is required. d. Install pipe insulation of at least the minimum thickness specified in Table 23 0700-1.
2. Insulation installation a. Fiberglass installation: (1) Apply insulation to the pipe by opening the seam and then closing it after placement. Flap edges should be pointing down at the 3 o'clock or 9 o'clock position. Remove release paper and seal flap. Apply butt strips at joints. Rub down all edges with a plastic squeegee. (2) Staple flap on 6" centers starting at center. Seal staples with all service jacket tape. (3) Seal ends of pipe insulation at all valves, fittings, flanges and hangers with adhesive.
3. Valves, unions, flanges, and fittings: Insulate valves, unions, flanges and fittings as specified in paragraph 3.2 F. 4. Expansion Joints: Insulate all expansion joints with blanket type insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation. Hold the blanket in place by wire or galvanized straps for ease of removal.
B. Chilled Water Piping 1. General a. Unless otherwise specified, insulate all chilled water piping. b. A vapor barrier shall be provided at all insulated surfaces. c. Install pump casing with removable insulation to allow for periodic maintenance. d. Install pipe insulation of at least the minimum thickness specified in Table 23 0700-1.
2. Insulation installation a. Fiberglass insulation: (1) Apply insulation to the pipe by opening the seam and then closing it after placement. Flap edges should be down at the 3 o'clock or 9 o'clock position. Remove release paper
23 0700-7 and seal flap. Apply butt strips at joints. Rub down all edges with a plastic squeegee. (2) Staple flap on 6" centers starting at center. Seal staples with vapor barrier adhesive. (3) Seal ends of pipe insulation at all valves, fittings, flanges and hangers with vapor barrier coating.
3. Valves, unions, flanges, and fittings: Insulate valves, unions, flanges and fittings as specified in paragraph 3.2. F.
C. Valves, Flanges, Unions, Fittings, Air Separators and Pump Casings. Insulate valves, flanges, unions, and fittings in all types of systems, air separators in heating and chilled water systems, and pump casing for chilled water systems as follows.
1. Option 1: Insulate with pre-molded insulation sections. Secure sections in place with all service jacket tape and trim insulation to assure an even transition with adjacent pipe insulation. Apply glass cloth circumferentially around insulation sections and then apply vapor barrier mastic over the entire surface to provide a vapor seal. 2. Option 2: Insulate with factory precut, two layer insulation and cover with factory pre-molded, one piece PVC fitting covers. Tuck the ends of the insulation snugly into the throat of the fitting cover and the edges adjacent to the pipe fitting. Secure the fitting cover with vapor barrier master or by taping the ends circumferentially with PVC sealing tape to the adjacent pipe covering. Tape shall overlap at least 1/4 in. and extend a minimum of 2 in. onto the pipe covering. 3. For flexible elastomeric or polyolefin insulation for fittings, flanges and valves shall be pre-molded, precut or job fabricated of the same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent pipe.
D. Exterior Piping 1. General a. All insulated piping which is "outdoors" or exposed to weather shall be provided with a suitable jacket or coating. Jackets may be provided as part of the insulation system if specified for exterior use by the manufacturer. Installation to be per manufacturer's recommendations. b. Insulation shall be carried through building wall and terminated with sealed ends inside building or continued as required.
2. Metal Jacket Installation a. Jackets shall be installed with metal bands securing the jacket in place. Bands shall be located at butt joint overlaps and spaced between butt joints. b. Overlaps in the jacket shall be positioned to shed water. Butt joint overlaps shall be wide enough to provide weatherproofing. c. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
23 0700-8 E. Minimum Pipe Insulation The minimum pipe insulation thickness specified in Table 23 0700-1 are for fiberglass pipe insulation and meet the Model Energy Code (1992) and ASHRAE Standard 90A. Thicknesses of other types of insulation shall be adjusted to provide equivalent resistance to heat flow.
Table 23 0700-1 Minimum Thicknesses for Pipe Insulation
Insulation Thickness in Inches for Pipe Size (2)
Piping System Types Fluid Run- 1" and 1-1/4" 2-1/2" 5" to 8" Temperature outs up less to 2" to 4" 6" and Range to 2" (1) larger Heating Systems: 141-200 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 Hot Water 105-140 1 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 Cooling Systems: Chilled 40-55 1/2 1/2 1 1 1 1 Water
(1) Run outs to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length. (2) For piping exposed to outside air, increase thickness by 1/2 inch.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Low Temperature Equipment 1. General a. Unless otherwise specified, insulate low temperature equipment. b. Insulation thickness and materials for low temperature equipment shall be as follows. (1) Chilled water pumps - 1-1/2 in. fiberglass. (2) Chilled water storage tanks - 1-1/2 in. fiberglass. (3) Air separators - 1 in. fiberglass.
2. Chilled water pumps: Insulate chilled water pumps the same as valves, fittings, etc. Pump casing insulation shall be removable to allow for periodic maintenance.
3.4 DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Inside Duct Liner See Section 23 3000, Air Distribution
B. Outside Duct Wrap 1. General a. Reference Section 23 3000, Air Distribution, for description of ducts requiring insulation. b. Supply and/or return ductwork located within conditioned spaces served by this ductwork, do not require insulation. Ductwork passing through a space that is not supplied air by this ductwork requires insulation. Mechanical rooms and ceiling plenums are not
23 0700-9 conditioned spaces and duct insulation is required. c. Ductwork insulated inside and factory insulated ducts need not be insulated on the outside. d. Insulation for exposed rectangular ducts shall be fiberglass board. Insulation for other ducts shall be fiberglass duct wrap. e. Ducts for outside air intakes or ducts exposed to the weather shall have 2 in. thick insulation.
2. Installation a. Fiberglass board: Secure board insulation tightly and smoothly with not less than 50 per cent coverage of bonding adhesive. After application of adhesive, secure the insulation tightly and smoothly with speed washers and welded pins. Space pins not over 18 inches apart each way, not over 3 inches from edges of insulation joints, and capable of supporting a load of 20 pounds per pin. Apply insulation with all joints, in close mechanical contact and all open joints, breaks, punctures and voids filled with vapor barrier coating. Where pins are welded to ducts, use a welding procedure which will not distort the duct, will not burn through, or will not mar the interior finish of the duct, but will develop the full strength of the pin. Provide pin sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of the insulation specified. Joints in jacket shall be taped with 4 in. wide FSK tape. b. Fiberglass duct wrap: Secure duct wrap tightly and smoothly with a bonding adhesive applied in 6 in. transverse strips on 12 in. centers. When the long side of the duct or the duct diameter is 24 inches or more, secure insulation also with speed washers and pins as specified for board insulation. Pins shall be spaced not more than 13 inches apart each way. Do not permit sagging of the insulation and provide sufficient bonding adhesive or fasteners to prevent this. Joints in jacket shall be taped with 4 in. wide FSK tape. c. All cuts and tears shall be sealed with strips of 4 in. wide FSK tape.
END OF SECTION
23 0700-10 SECTION 23 0900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL A. Temperature controls will be provided by the Owner.
1.2 SUBMITTALS A. For coordination purposes, the Owner will prepare shop drawings for review by the Contractor. Upon Contractor review and acceptance, the shop drawings shall be part of the shop drawings of the project.
B. At the completion of the project, these shop drawings shall be included by the Contractor with the mechanical "record" documents as described in Section 23 0000 and Division 01.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CONTROL ITEMS A. The Owner will furnish the following items to the Contractor for their installation. 1. Control Valves 2. VAV controllers 3. Damper Actuators 4. Line Voltage Thermostats
PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
23 0900-1 SECTION 23 2000 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED (But Not Limited To) A. Heating water piping. B. Chilled water piping. C. Drain pan piping. D. Valves and specialties. E. Pumps. F. Boilers. G. Chillers. H. Heat release equipment. I. Air handling units. J. Air control assemblies. K. Water treatment. L. Glycol feeders.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Requirements." B. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." C. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." E. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing for HVAC."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (See Section 23 0500 for other acceptable manufacturers.) A. All balancing valves, venturies and flow stations are furnished by Boulder County and installed by the mechanical contractor.
B. Piping Materials 1. Low Pressure (124 psi and less) Low Temperature (249 0F and less) Contractor's option, either steel or copper for water pipe as outlined below. All fittings to be long radius pattern. a. Steel Pipe (4" and larger) (1) Chilled water, and hot water heating piping; Schedule 40, ASTM-A106 Grade B black steel. (2) Fittings on pipe 2-1/2" and over, use forged steel, standard weight, butt weld. Where flanging to valves, equipment, etc., use 150 lb. forged steel flanges or 125 lb. cast iron flanges. For branch lines on welded installation, welding
23 2000-1 tees, thread-o-lets or weld-o-lets shall be used. No stub-in branches will be approved.
b. Copper Pipe (3" and smaller) (1) Hot water heating piping and chilled water piping including those filled with glycol solutions; wrapped type "K" hard drawn copper ASTM B88 with wrought copper fittings and BCuP2 classification brazing alloy for all buried lines. For non-buried lines; type "L" hard drawn copper ASTM B88 with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 (tin/antimony), 96-4 tin/silver) or Canfield 100% Watersafe (silver-tin-copper) solder. Where copper pipe is jointed to brass use BCuP2 classification brazing alloy. Drain pan piping; type "M" copper with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 (tin/antimony) solder on all lines not buried. Type "L" copper with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 (tin/antimony) solder for all buried lines. (2) Drain pan piping; type “M” copper with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 (tin/antimony) solder on all lines not buried. Type “L” copper with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 (tin/antimony) solder for all buried lines.
C. Valve and Specialty Schedule 1. Steel, Low Pressure (124 psi and less) Low Temperature (249 oF and less) a. Ball Valves Up to and including 2-1/2 inches: Bronze, two piece or uni-body full port with chrome plated ball valve, reinforced TFE seats and stuffing box, lever handle, and threaded ends. 400 psi WOG, 150 psi saturated steam. 3 inches and above: Carbon steel, uni-body full port with chrome plated ball valve, reinforced TFE seats and seals, lever handle and ANSI Class 150 flanged ends. 285 psi WOG, 150 psi saturated steam. b. Butterfly Valves 150 psi W.P. for 250 0F service, positive tight shut off for flow in either direction. Provide lever handle for sizes through 6", totally enclosed gear actuator 8" and larger. Full or semi lug (no wafer type) iron body to permit retention of valve to one flange only. Field replaceable resilient seat and bronze or aluminum bronze disc.
Extended neck to allow for 2" of insulation when used in insulated lines. Centerline Series 200, Demco NEI, DeZurik BGS, ITT Grinnell Series 8000, Keystone AR2, Stockham LD-700 Series, Bray 31 or equivalent. c. Plug Valves 175 psi W.O.G., 150 psi W.P. for 250 oF service. Eccentric, positive tight shut off valve with permanently lubricated stem bearing surfaces in upper and lower journals. Provide adjustable position stop for all valves used in balancing service. Lever actuated on sizes 5"-8" where pressures do not exceed 100 psi. Gear actuated
23 2000-2 on higher pressures and on all sizes 10" and larger. Gears to have adjustable position stop. DeZurik Figure #118, Keystone Series 500 or equivalent. d. Globe Valves Class 150, 300 psi W.O.G. bronze screwed for 2" and smaller; Class 125, 200 psi W.O.G. iron or Class 150, 300 psi cast steel, bronze mounted, flanged for 2-1/2" and above. e. Check Valves (1) Class 150, 300 psi W.O.G. bronze screwed for 2" and smaller; Class 125, 300 psi iron, bronze trim, flanged for 2- 1/2" and above. (2) 125 psi W.P. iron noiseless check valve for pump discharges, Gulf Valve MB12, Metraflex CHEXX Model C125/150, Clow 329, "Muessco" 101-AP, "Streamflow" 153, Techno 5050, Victaulic Style 711 or 715, or equivalent. f. Balancing Valve All circuit setter balancing valves will be provided by Boulder County Facilities for installation by the mechanical contractor. g. Unions 300 lb. W.O.G. malleable iron screwed or 125 lb. cast iron flanged union. h. Strainers (for steam or water as required) (1) “Y” type: semi-steel or cast iron, screwed (250 lb.) or flanged (125 lb.), with stainless steel screen. (2) Basket type: Cast iron body with flanged connections and stainless steel removable basket, 1/8" staggered perforations, Haywood Model 72 or equivalent by Kinney, Elliot or Zurn. i. Pressure Gauges 3” minimum dial, bronze bourdon tube with 1/4" pipe thread bottom mount, steel case, white face with black lettering, screw driver calibration. Accuracy to be 1% of full scale or better. Pressure ranges to be approximately double the expected working pressure of the service. Brass lever handled cock rated to 200 psi and bronze siphon. (1) For water temperatures up to 150°F: wet gauge - Trerice 600C, or equivalent by Ashcroft, Danton, Dwyer, Foxboro, Marsh, Marshalltown, Meriam, Mueller, U.S. Gauge, Weiss, or Wika. (2) For water temperatures over 150°F: dry gauge – Trerice 450 or equivalent by Ashcroft, Danton, Dwyer, Foxboro, Marsh, Marshalltown, Meriam, Mueller, U.S. Gauge, or Weiss. j. Pressure Temperature Taps 1/2” NPT, or EPDM core, Peterson Equipment Company #710, Sisco, or Hydro-Temp BNO-500, MG P/T, or equivalent. k. Thermometers Multi-angle with 9" scale case with glass or lucite face and
23 2000-3 separable socket, red reading mercury, bottom or back pipe thread connection. Ranges at least 50% higher than highest expected temperature of the service and at least 20 degrees lower than the lowest expected temperature. Accuracy to be 1% of full scale or better. U.S. Gauge MN-9, Trerice A400, Duro 9 EZ, Weiss 9 VS or equivalent by Davis, Copper, Foxboro, Marshalltown or Taylor. l. Dielectric Unions Unions rated for 250 psi with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end and impervious isolation gasket approved for use on gas, oil, air, water and steam lines.
2. Copper, Low Pressure (124 psi and less) Low Temperature (249 oF and less) a. Ball Valves 3” and smaller: bronze, two piece or full port, chrome plated bronze ball with reinforced Teflon seats and packing, 400 psi W.O.G. screwed or solder. b. Butterfly Valves 2” and smaller: bronze, stainless steel disc and stem, VITON seal, 175 psi working pressure, 350 psi W.O.G., screwed or solder. c. Globe Valves (Rising Stem) Class 150, 300 lb. W.O.G. bronze, screwed or solders ends. d. Check Valves Class 150, 300 lb. W.O.G. bronze, screwed or solders ends, or Class 150, 300 lb. WOG, iron or cast steel, flanged. e. Unions Cast brass type f. Balancing Valve, Strainers, Pressure Gauges, Pressure Temperature Taps, Thermometers, Dielectric Unions. Same as specified for steel, suitable for use in copper pipe.
D. Equipment Schedule
AIR HANDLER UNIT AHU-1 and MAKE-UP AIR UNIT MUA-3 GENERAL Provide where indicated, factory assembled, Energy Recovery Unit, including the following:
• Polymer tube indirect evaporative cooling system • Supply and return fans with VFD’s • Control air dampers • Supply air filters • Exhaust air filters • Chilled water cooling coil • Hot water heating coil • Complete DDC control system, factory installed, wired, and programmed with LONWORKS interface card.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Wiring internal to the unit shall be wired to a numbered terminal strip for simplified
23 2000-4 identification and ease of trouble shooting. Units shall be ETL listed and labeled, classified in accordance with UL 1995/CAN/CSA/ No. 236-M90.
The manufacturer must have a quality management system in place, equal to the quality assurance standard ISO 9001-2000, for the design, manufacture, and service of heat exchangers and packaged ventilation/air conditioning equipment.
Standard catalog units requiring modification to meet these specifications, or units that are field assembled, shall not be considered or accepted.
To ensure manufacturer credibility, the manufacturer must have a net worth greater than five times the value of the equipment being bid. The manufacturer must also be able to demonstrate prior experience manufacturing heat recovery air handling systems by providing to the consulting engineer, prior to bid, a reference list of at least five similar jobs manufactured over the prior five years.
WARRANTY Manufacturer shall warrant products to be free of defects in workmanship and material under normal usage for a period of 12 months from factory documented start-up or 18 months from date of original shipment, whichever occurs first. Manufacturer shall maintain a Service Department, sufficiently staffed to handle all warranty claims in a timely manner.
SUBMITTALS Manufacturer shall provide detailed product submittals that include all physical data, performance, electrical, control, installation, and other product data as required for proper engineering evaluation and contractor installation.
CASING BASE FRAME: The base of the package shall consist of an all-welded structural “C” channel steel frame with tubular and angular cross-members as required to maintain floor rigidity and frame stiffness. The base shall be painted with one coat of a lead-free, rust- inhibiting, alkyd metal primer, followed by two coats corrosion and weather resistant 100% acrylic latex paint. Four or more lifting lugs designed to work with clevises shall be an integral part of the structural frame and shall be welded on, or shipped loose for bolt on in the field where required to reduce shipping width.
‘C’ channel base frames, on roof curb mounted units, shall include structural angle, welded to the inner side of the ‘C’ channel web, such that the angle rests on top of the roof curb, and the ‘C’ channel extends down, along the exterior of the curb to serve as flashing. Gasket is to be furnished and installed by the contractor, sandwiched between the angle and the top of the roof curb. Equipment that requires separate flashing strips between the curb and the base of the unit shall be unacceptable.
UNIT CASING: Two inch double wall casing. Exterior walls and roof shall be constructed of pre- painted 18 gauge galvannealed steel. Exterior coating shall pass a documented 2,000-hour salt spray test per ASTM B117. Inner liner shall be 22ga. galvannealed
23 2000-5 steel. Two inch thick, 1.5 pound per square foot insulation shall be secured between inner and outer walls. The insulation shall be secured between the inner and outer walls and shall not be exposed to any air streams. All roof and sidewall seams shall be positively sealed to prevent water and air leakage. Air leakage shall be less than 1% of design airflow at 1-1/2 times maximum unit operating pressure. All fastening hardware between wall panels shall be concealed within the wall for a clean exterior appearance with minimal penetrations. Roofs of outdoor mounted units shall be pitched to one side, with a gutter on the low side. Unit shall be constructed to limit frame and panel deflection to 1/200th of its span in any direction. Tubular frame or aluminum post type construction shall not be accepted due to excessive thermal bridging at panel joints, and poor weather seal characteristics.
The casing shall house the fans, motors, coils, heat exchangers, and all factory- supplied optional equipment. For outdoor units, intake and exhaust hoods shall be provided. All intake and exhaust penetrations shall be covered with an aluminum bird-screen, which is separate from the hood. Hoods may ship loose for field assembly and installation by contractor. When hoods are field installed, the seam formed by the hood and casing must be caulked with silicone by the Contractor to prevent water leakage. All intake hoods shall have a maximum 500 feet per minute face velocity through the free area intake. Hood construction shall match that of the outer casing.
ACCESS DOORS: Hinged access doors shall be provided for inspection and maintenance of fans, coils, filters, evaporative cooling sumps, and other areas requiring routine inspection and maintenance. Access doors shall be gasketed around the perimeter with weather-resistant closed-cell neoprene gasket. The door shall be insulated the same as the unit casing, and double-wall constructed with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinges for rigidity and airtight enclosure. A minimum of two adjustable glass reinforced nylon door latches shall be furnished for each hinged door. Each door handle shall be provided with large nylon roller cam for ease of operation and superior gasket compression. Each hinged door shall include a locking mechanism that requires the use of a tool to open for safety and security purposes prior to unit startup. Handles shall be operable from either side of the door. Doorframes shall be a minimum 16 gauge aluminized steel or 304L stainless steel, welded at the corners. Doors shall have adhesive-backed stickers applied to their exterior surfaces which indicate the compartment contents and any safety/hazards within the enclosure. All exterior doors shall be equipped with rain gutters.
FLOORS: Floor shall be constructed of 16gauge aluminized steel, with all seams fully welded. Underside of floor shall be totally insulated with R-8 closed cell foam insulation. Floors shall have an upturned flange around the entire perimeter and around all interior chases to contain moisture within the unit. The entire floor and upturn flanges must be factory water tested and certified leak proof for a period of five years from the date of shipment. Multiple 1-1/2 inch floor drains shall be provided to route moisture to either side or bottom of unit (see plans for specific drain locations). Unit drains shall be sized to remove any condensate that is created
23 2000-6 within the casing as a natural part of the recovery, dehumidification, or evaporative cooling blow-down/overflow process. Each drain must be trapped separately by the contractor and piped to roof drain. Heat tracing may be required for drains in cold climates. Drains shall be flush with the unit floor so as not to create a trip hazard. Each floor penetration/ drain hole shall be circumferentially fillet welded to prevent water leakage under the unit floor. The use of sealants for this purpose shall not be acceptable. All drains and associated piping are to be fully welded and tested. Expanded aluminized steel gratings shall be installed over supply and return air openings.
HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER (Base Design)
Heat pipe air-to-air heat exchanger shall have the thermal performance characteristics and pressure drops as scheduled. Heat exchanger shall be sized to handle 100% of the supply and exhaust CFM. Heat exchangers sized for less than full flow shall not be approved.
Heat exchanger shall be constructed of one-piece extruded aluminum tubes installed within a 16-gauge stainless (304) steel casing providing both structural integrity as well as an airtight seal. The heat pipes shall be individually charged 1" I.D pipes with 0.063-inch wall thickness. Fins shall be of 0.015 mean thickness, tapered root to fin tip. Fin surface from root to fin tip shall have aluminum of 0.437 inch mean fin height. Fin density shall be 11 fins per inch. Heat pipes shall be a maximum of 2-1/8 inch on center in the face, and shall be 1-7/8 inch on center row-to-row.
Tubes are coated for corrosion resistance.
The heat exchanger shall be a regular product of the dehumidifier manufacturer who must have at least 10 years of heat exchanger manufacturing experience prior to bid time. Heat pipes shall be individually processed, weld-sealed, charged, and factory tested. Each pipe is constructed with an individual charging valve, which provides the opportunity to take advantage of future refrigerant developments. Heat transfer fluid shall be Class I in the American National Safety Code for mechanical refrigeration. Heat exchanger performance shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84-1991 and ARI Standard 1060. Heat Pipes that require charging in the field are not acceptable.
Two component heat pipes such as expanded tube-to-fin shall not be acceptable in order to prevent efficiency degradation resulting from the eventual weakening of the fin-to-tube bond with age. Individual heat pipes shall be furnished within the casing and will accommodate expansion unique to each tube without damage to the integrity of the entire heat exchanger. Plate fin coil-type heat exchangers shall not be acceptable because of the shortened life caused by non-floating heat exchanger tubes.
INDIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLING SECTION
Heat pipe heat exchanger shall have an integral spray manifold on the exhaust side for indirect evaporative cooling. Spray manifold shall consist of PVC water
23 2000-7 distribution header and cooling tower clip-on type spray nozzles (easily removable for cleaning and maintenance). Nozzles shall be rotationally adjustable, such that the sprays can be redirected as required for optimal wetting. The water distribution system shall supply water equally to all tubes in the system.
An all welded 304 stainless steel sump shall be installed beneath heat exchanger. Piping shall be engineered to allow for easy adjustment of system pressures and flow, bleed rates, and pump cooling when required. Sump overflow pipe, level controls, and float valve shall be part of factory furnished and installed components. A single potable water feed shall be provided by the installing contractor for the indirect cooling system. Contractor shall install a pressure regulating valve on the intake water, limiting the water pressure to 40 psig as required.
Indirect evaporative cooler shall have mist eliminator media installed immediately downstream of wetted heat pipe. Mist eliminator media shall be constructed of rigid, UV resistant PVC, corrosion and scale resistant, suitable for operating at temperatures up to 130F continuously. Mist eliminator shall be supported by aluminum holding frames.
Indirect spray pumps shall be submersible type, with epoxy coated cast iron motor housing, oil filled for lifetime lubrication and rapid heat dissipation. Pump shall have stainless steel screws, bolts, and handle, integral thermal overload protection, and mechanical shaft seal with stainless steel spring, nitrile parts, carbon and ceramic faces.
Manufacturer shall furnish, for contractor installation and wiring, 1” or 3/4” make-up and line drain solenoid valves (varies with unit size) and 1-1/2” sump drain solenoid valves. Sump freeze protection and automatic sump dump every 24 hours shall be part of factory control system included.
Heat exchangers shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84-1991, “Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers”, ARI Standard 1060, “Rating Air-to- Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment”, and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 143-2000 “Method of Test for Rating Indirect Evaporative Coolers.
NON CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FOR INDIRECT COOLING SUMP
2" pulsed power water treatment system, piped and factory wired to the discharge side of the indirect evaporative cooling pump. Conductivity controller with flow switch and motorized bleed valve, factory installed and wired. One-year of on site service by local Dolphin rep (total of up to 3 visits included). There shall be one manual bleed, initially set for 1 GPM, in addition to the controlled bleed based on water conductivity.
POLYMER TUBE CROSS FLOW AIR-TO-AIR HEAT EXCHANGER/INDIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLER (Alternate) Heat recovery section shall be an updraft air-to-air heat exchanger with the thermal performance characteristics and pressure drops as scheduled. Heat exchanger
23 2000-8 shall be sized to handle 100% of the supply and exhaust CFM. Heat exchangers sized for less than full flow shall not be approved.
Engineered, elliptical tubes shall be used as the primary heat exchanger surface. Tubes shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant polymer with internally extruded ribbing for enhanced heat transfer. The polymer material shall be fire retardant, meeting UL94 V-O standards. The heat exchanger shall be tested and approved to UL900 class II. When sprayed for indirect evaporative cooling, water leakage from exhaust/scavenger side to supply side shall be less than 0.001 gallons per hour per 10,000 CFM of primary air.
Tubes shall be elastic in design, flexing slightly as exhaust fans start/stop to facilitate shedding of dissolved solids buildup. Tube design must have a proven performance record for more than five years operating in hard water, arid conditions.
All heat exchanger surfaces shall be non-metallic, suitable for continuous operation in temperatures up to 130F. Aluminum, polymer, or stainless steel plate-type or heat pipe heat exchangers will not be considered or approved as a substitute for the specified tubular heat exchanger.
Heat exchanger shall have an integral spray manifold for indirect evaporative cooling and wash down, such that exhaust filters are not required. Spray manifold shall consist of PVC water distribution header and cooling tower clip-on type spray nozzles (easily removable for cleaning and maintenance). The water distribution system shall supply water equally to all tubes in the system. An all welded 16 ga. stainless steel drain pan shall be installed beneath heat exchanger to collect and route water to the sump. Piping shall be in accordance with the detailed piping diagram shown on the plans.
Indirect spray pumps shall be submersible type, with epoxy coated cast iron motor housing, oil filled for lifetime lubrication and rapid heat dissipation. Pump shall have stainless steel screws, bolts, and handle, integral thermal overload protection, and mechanical shaft seal with stainless steel spring, nitrile parts, carbon and ceramic faces.
16 ga 304L stainless steel sump, PVC water piping and distribution header, manual bleed valve, overflow pipe, level controls, and float valve shall be part of factory furnished and installed components. A potable water feed shall be provided by the installing contractor.
3/4" make-up, 3/4" line drain, and 1-1/2”sump drain solenoid valves (shipped loose for field piping and wiring by contractor), shall be factory furnished. Sump freeze protection and automatic sump dump every 24 hours shall be part of factory control system included.
Heat exchangers shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84-1991, “Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers”, ARI Standard 1060, “Rating Air-to- Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment”, and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 143-2000 “Method of Test for Rating Indirect Evaporative
23 2000-9 Coolers. Independent laboratory test data must be supplied by the manufacturer, when requested by the consulting engineer, documenting the thermal effectiveness of the heat exchanger when operating in the heat recovery mode, and the wet bulb depression effectiveness when operating as an indirect evaporative cooler.
SUPPLY FAN The supply air fan(s) shall be centrifugal plenum type of the scheduled size.
Plenum fans shall be AMCA certified, class I or II, heavy duty, centrifugal plenum type with non-overloading wheel. Flexible duct connections shall be provided to isolate the fan from the cabinet housing as required. Bearing supports shall be constructed of structural steel members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the fan shaft and bearings. Bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated, self- aligning ball or roller pillow block type. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-50) per AFBMA Standards of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed for each pressure class and shall be rigidly mounted on welded structural steel members to prevent vibration. Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class. Fan performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA Publication 211 and Publication 311 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fans shall bear the AMCA seal. Fans with forward curved wheels shall be unacceptable.
EXHAUST FAN(S) The exhaust air fan(s) shall be backward inclined single width type of the scheduled size.
Fans shall be centrifugal heavy duty, class I or II, backward inclined SWSI with grease fittings. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced from the vendor, and shall be mounted, with the motor and drive, on a structural sub-base chassis. Bearings shall have an average life of 200,000 hours per AFBMA standards and shall be rigidly mounted on welded structural steel members to prevent vibration. Belt drives shall have a 1.5 service factor.
MOTORS AND DRIVES Motors shall be factory pre-wired to motor starter or VFD as specified. Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases to allow for proper belt tensioning.
Premium efficiency, TECF, type motors shall be furnished for all fans. Each drive shall have two V-belts minimum.
DAMPERS All dampers shall be of the low leakage airfoil blade type with blade edge and side seals. Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum frames (6063T5) of not less than 2.03 mm thickness. Blades shall be of extruded aluminum profiles with blade gaskets of extruded EPDM. Frame seals shall be of extruded TPE. Gaskets shall be secured in an integral slot within aluminum extrusions.
23 2000-10 Bearings to be comprised of a celcon inner bearing fixed to an 11.11 mm aluminum hexagon blade pin rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in frame. Linkage hardware shall be installed in frame side and be constructed of aluminum and corrosion resistant zinc & nickel-plated steel, complete with cup- point trunnion screws for slip-proof grip.
Air leakage through a 48” x 48” damper shall not exceed 10.3 CFM/sq. ft against 4” W.G. differential static pressure with standard air. Standard air leakage data to be certified under the AMCA certified ratings program. Pressure drop through a fully open 48” x 48” damper shall not exceed 0.02” W.G. at 1000 FPM.
The following dampers shall be provided:
• Outside Air, with factory installed and wired modulating actuator • Exhaust Air, gravity backdraft type • Recirculation Air, with factory installed and wired modulating actuator • Heat exchanger bypass, with factory installed and wired modulating actuator
DIRECT EXPANSION COIL (Alternate) Direct expansion-cooling coil shall be sized to provide cooling/moisture removal of the capacity indicated on the equipment schedule. Coil shall be furnished with interlaced refrigerant circuits so that the entire coil face area is active when the unit is in operation.
Coil shall be copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum fins with a galvanized steel casing. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 500 feet per minute. The coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI standard 410
Coils shall have an integral all seam welded stainless steel drain pan with a minimum depth of two inches. Drain pan shall be part of the all welded floor, recessed, and sloped toward basins. Basins shall be provided minimum every 60” and allow for capture and cleaning of larger debris. Minimum basin size is 6” x 3” x 1.75” deep. Underneath of the entire drain pan, and basins, shall be insulated with spray urethane insulation positively preventing any underneath condensate from forming. Entire coil assembly, including safe-offs shall be inside of the recessed drain pan. Drain pans that sit on top of unit floor shall not be acceptable due to water management issues. An access door shall be provided on each side of the coil, where feasible, to allow coil removal.
All coils over 42 inches in length shall incorporate a 16 gauge galvanized tube support at the center of the fin length; coils over 96 inches in fin length shall incorporate additional tube supports. Coils shall be sealed around the perimeter (between the coil flanges and the unit casing channels) with silicone or polyurethane sealant to eliminate air bypass and prevent moisture carryover.
AIR-COOLED CONDENSING SECTION (Alternate) Provide an integral, factory piped, charged and wired mechanical refrigeration system designed and built by the same manufacturer as the Energy Recovery Unit. Third party refrigeration systems or system provided by manufactures with
23 2000-11 less than 10 years of refrigeration manufacturing experience shall not be accepted.
The Air Cooled Condensing unit shall be manufactured by Munters / Des Champs Technologies and include the following:
Multiple Tandem Compressor sets that are direct drive, hermetic, scroll type with centrifugal gear type oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts.
Each tandem compressor set shall be individual circuited to the DX coil. Compressor motors shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent unit nameplate voltage. Temperature and current sensitive motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Compressors shall have vibration isolation to minimize vibration transmission and noise. Provide minimum run time and minimum off times as well as interstage timers.
All power and control wiring shall be run in UV resistant Nylon Conduit.
Each refrigerant circuit shall be made of Type L copper; nitrogen purged during all brazing processes, Include Filter Drier and Sight glass. Provide Thermal Expansion Valves with External Equalized Balancing Port to ensure stable operation over entire stroke range. Provide Superheat of 10-12°F. Refrigerant System shall be able to safety operate down to 35°F SST.
Provide each circuit with a High and Low Pressure cut out switches independently wired to the control panel. Use of the compressor’s internal High Side to Low Side relief valve is not an adequate substitution for the required external low side pressure cut out.
Each compressor shall be provided with crankcase heaters and automatic pump down cycle. Provide the following items for proper pump down cycle: Check Valves, Normally Closed Electric Solenoid Valves.
Provide Hot Gas Bypass on lead compressor.
Condenser coil shall be of internally finned copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. Condenser coils shall be located in the exhaust airstream downstream of IEC sprays and mist eliminator for more efficient condensing.
CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL (Base bid) A chilled water cooling coil shall be sized to provide cooling of the capacity indicated on the equipment schedule.
Coil shall be copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum fins with a galvanized steel casing. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 500 feet per minute. The coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI standard 410.
Tubes shall have a minimum tube wall thickness of 0.035 inches. Tube arrangement shall be staggered and heat transfer shall be counter-flow. Coils
23 2000-12 shall have brazed copper inlet and drainable outlet headers and iron connections. Supply and return connections shall be male pipe thread of the size scheduled. Both supply and return coil connections shall be located at the same end of the coil, and all coils shall be horizontal.
Coil shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards. Coils shall meet the requirements of ANSI B31.1 for pressure piping.
An access door shall be provided on each side of the coil, where feasible, to allow coil removal. All coils over 42 inches in length shall incorporate a 16 gauge galvanized tube support at the center of the fin length; coils over 96 inches in fin length shall incorporate additional tube supports. Coils shall be sealed around the perimeter (between the coil flanges and the unit casing channels) with silicone or polyurethane sealant to eliminate air bypass and prevent moisture carryover.
HOT WATER HEATING COIL A hot water heating coil shall be sized to provide reheat of the capacity indicated on the equipment schedule.
Coil shall be copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum fins with a galvanized steel casing. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 850 feet per minute. The coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI standard 410
Tubes shall have a minimum tube wall thickness of 0.035 inches. Tube arrangement shall be staggered and heat transfer shall be counter-flow. Coils shall have brazed copper inlet and drainable outlet headers and iron connections. Supply and return connections shall be male pipe thread of the size scheduled. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 850 feet per minute. Both supply and return coil connections shall be located at the same end of the coil, and all coils shall be horizontal.
Coil shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards. Coils shall meet the requirements of ANSI B31.1 for pressure piping.
An access door shall be provided on each side of the coil, where feasible, to allow coil removal. All coils over 42 inches in length shall incorporate a 16 gauge galvanized tube support at the center of the fin length; coils over 96 inches in fin length shall incorporate additional tube supports. Coils shall be sealed around the perimeter (between the coil flanges and the unit casing channels) with silicone or polyurethane sealant to eliminate air bypass.
AIR FILTERS Metallic pre-filters shall be installed in outside air hoods upstream of polymer tube heat exchangers.
Supply air filters shall be two inch pleated type as standard, providing an average efficiency of 30% by ASHRAE standard 52-76 test method. Maximum face velocity shall be 500 feet per minute. Filters must be provided standard on all air entering sides of air-to-air heat exchangers.
23 2000-13 Supply air final filters shall be twelve-inch box type, providing an average efficiency of 85% by ASHRAE standard 52-76 test method. Maximum face velocity shall be 500 feet per minute.
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS Unit shall require one 460/3ph main power feed. An integral electrical control panel shall be provided that has a hinged access door and an approved locking device. All required safety and automatic operating controls, including motor protection, and motor thermal overloads shall be included.
A fused control power transformer shall be furnished. All components shall be fully wired and tested prior to shipment and all major electrical components shall be UL listed. Electrical system shall be ETL listed and labeled, in accordance with UL 1995. A non-fused disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed on the unit. All internal power and control wiring shall be connected to a numbered terminal strip for easy troubleshooting. Any conduit used shall not be run across or come into contact with the floor.
All power wiring shall be in liquid-tight conduit.
All wiring penetrations between air handler sections, and into electrical panel, shall be completely sealed to eliminate air and moisture transfer.
TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY, AND PRESSURE CONTROLS An electronic programmable microprocessor-based logic controller (PLC) with key pad input and LCD display shall be furnished to control the unit. Set points and 365-day clock functions including daylight savings, holiday programming and user overrides, shall be easily input by the operator. All sensors, as required to accomplish the specified sequence of control, shall be provided and factory wired to the extent possible. All external sensors shall be installed by the contractor.
See schedule for capacities.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Munters / Des Champs Haakon, Innovent or Engineered Air
WATER CHILLER, AIR COOLED C-1
General The unit is to be completely factory assembled and wired in a single package complete with screw compressors, evaporator, air-cooled condenser, starting control and safety and operating controls. It is to be given a complete factory operating and control sequence test under load conditions and is to be shipped with full operating charge of R-134A and full oil charge.
The unit shall be built in accordance with all applicable national and local codes including the ARI standard 550/590-98 and ANSI B9.1 safety code; the National Electrical Code, applicable ASME code for Unfired Pressure Vessels/CRN approved vessels and utilize UL/CSA approved components.
23 2000-14
Compressor Compressor shall be gear or direct drive, semi-hermetic or hermetic, fixed compression, rotary screw compressor with control panel.
Provide differential refrigerant pressure oil pump (if applicable), oil heater, oil separator and filter, oil charging valve. Open drive compressor(s) to have AFBMA9 L-10 bearings life expectancy at 200,000 hours. Compressor shall bemounted on rubber-in-shear isolators.
Motor: Gas cooled, hermetically sealed, squirrel cage induction indoor (Class "H" motor winding insulation).
Minimum control shall include: 1. Anti-recycle timer. 2. Solid state overload relay for each compressor. 3. Cycle counter and hour meter per compressor. 4. Low and high-pressure control. 5. Automatic shutdown compressor overload and low and high refrigerant pressure. 6. Standard unit shall operate to 0 oF.
Automatic Capacity Reduction: Continuously variable slide valve with infinitely variable control to 15 percent of full load. In the event that the manufacturer cannot provide a unit with 15% modulation, hot gas bypass must be provided.
Provide acoustic blankets on compressors and discharge refrigerant piping.
Evaporator Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless internally finned copper tubes, roller expanded or brazed into tube sheets.
Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 250 psig (2068 kPa) working pressure and water side for 150 psig (1482 kPa) working pressure, in accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 8.
Insulate with 0.75-inch (20 mm) minimum thick flexible elastomeric rubber closed cell insulation with maximum K value of 0.26. Provide heat tape to protect evaporator to -20 degrees F (-29 degrees C).
Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors.
Water piping connections (flanged, welded or grooved) shall be as required for job site conditions. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one leaving connection. If a unit, due to its size, is required to have additional connections, all interconnecting piping shall be factory furnished for field installation.
Condenser and fans
23 2000-15 Construct condenser coils of aluminum fins mechanically bonded copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits. Air test under water to 400 psig (3488 kPa).
Provide vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge. Entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced and fan assembly shall be either painted or zinc coated steel. Fan guard shall be PVC, chrome or zinc coated.
Provide fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection. Provide factory mounted hail guards to protect vertical condenser coil finned area from hail and wind. Vee bank coil designs shall be exempt.
Enclosures House components in 12 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel frame and mounted on welded structural steel base. Hot-dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) recognized as G90-U, UL guide number DTHW2.
Refrigerant Circuit All units above 75 tons shall have a minimum of 2 refrigeration circuits, each with one or two (manifolded) compressors on each circuit. Liquid lines shall include a shut-off valve with charging port, sight glass with moisture indicator, direct acting thermal expansion valve solenoid valve and replaceable core filter drier. The entire suction line and liquid line between the expansion valve and the cooler shall be insulated.
Power Panel The power panel(s) shall contain the compressor power terminals, compressor motor starting contactors with external over-load protection, current transformer sensing for each compressor phase, for protection against under voltage, over voltage, imbalanced voltage, single phasing, phase reversal, compressor stall and voltage spikes, and control power supply terminal strip for 115-1-60. The power panel shall contain a 15 amp, 115 volt convenience outlet with Ground Fault Protection. The compressor and fan power wiring shall be routed through U.L. listed, liquid-tight, non-metallic conduit suitable for outdoor use.
Single Point Electrical Supply with Separate System Circuit Breakers Each system contains a circuit breaker with external handles in compliance with N.E.C. Article 440-14 to isolate the system for servicing.
Control Transformer Provide factory installed control transformer to convert unit power voltage to 115-1-60. Factory mounting will include primary and secondary wiring between the transformer and the control panel.
Water Flow Switch Johnson Controls model F61MB-1C Vapor-proof SPDT, NEMA 4X switch (150 psig DWP), -20 degrees Fahrenheit to 250 degrees Fahrenheit, with 1 inch MPT connection for upright mounting in horizontal pipe. This flow switch or its
23 2000-16 equivalent must be furnished with each unit.
Controls The chiller(s) shall be controlled by a stand-alone direct digital control (DDC) system. A dedicated Control Panel is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. The controller shall provide chiller capacity control in response to the leaving chilled water temperature.
On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel containing solid state reduced voltage starters, power and control wiring, molded case disconnect switch (UL approved) with external lockable operator handle. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformers. Provide separate 115 volt single phase circuit for evaporator heat tape.
The control panel shall utilize a Control Microprocessor which shall automatically take action to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with: evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condensing pressure and motor current overload.
Start-up Provide the services of a factory trained representative for a minimum of two days to start-up and concurrently train the Owner's personnel in unit operation.
See schedule for capacities.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Trane Carrier York or approved equivalent
BOILER B-1 and 2
Packaged, modulating sealed combustion, direct vent condensing hydronic boiler. The boiler(s) shall be certified and listed by C.S.A International, comply with CSD-1 Code requirements, and be ASME coded and stamped.
Complete With: Operating control with ___ °F differential Limit control with manual reset Combination pressure gauge and thermometer Low-water cutoff Lever handled ASME safety relief valve(s). Valve set to relieve at psig. Drain cock
Factory assembled gas-train including the following: Manual gas cock Gas pressure regulator, vented to outside atmosphere Automatic motorized gas valve Automatic solenoid safety gas valve
23 2000-17 Leak test valve Gas pressure gauge Pilot gas train Pilot cock Pilot gas pressure regulator Pilot gas solenoid valve
Provide high and low gas pressure switches.
Multiple jet flame retention type gas burners including the following: Forced draft fan with motor and magnetic starter (IF APPLICABLE). See Section 23 0500 for motor, phase protection and starter requirements. Transformer and 120/60/1 controls Ignition transformer for gas-electric ignition Electronic flame safeguard control sensitive to ultraviolet radiation to provide pre and post purge, time low fire start and high-low fire operation.
Control panel (boiler mounted and factory wired) shall house the following: Electronic flame safeguard control Airflow safety switch Burner on off switch Control circuit transformers and fuses. Magnetic starters Indicating lights Numbered terminal strip and wiring diagram provide alarm outputs or contacts
See schedule for capacities. Output is gross IBR.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Patterson Kelly Mach Lockinvar Intelifin RBI Futera Fusion
UNIT HEATER (WATER) UH-2 thru 7
Horizontal Model with individually adjustable horizontal louvers Copper tube and aluminum fin coil. Direct drive propeller fan with safety fan guard. Motor shall have built-in overloads. Suspend as required.
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL Trane Model S Trane Model P Vulcan HV, Vulcan VV, Modine HS, KHD ER, TRT ER Modine V, KHD VC, TRT VC Dunham Bush H Dunham Bush C or equivalent or equivalent
See schedule for capacities.
WALL FIN RADIATION WFR-1 thru 3
23 2000-18
Covers with baked enamel finish, height to accept tube rows specified. Cover to be 18 gauge except on cover heights 24" and greater, the cover shall be 16 gauge. Provide solid backplate for all radiation used in front of glass and paint this backplate two coats of paint before installation. Color to be selected by Architect. Enclosure brackets spaced at not more than four feet apart, and mounted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Include: Connecting strips, slide cradle hangers, end and corner caps, access doors in cover for all valves.
See schedule for capacities.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Sterling Trane Vulcan Dunham Bush Modine Rittling Engineered Air
PUMP P-1 thru 6
Pumps shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical for Contractor. Grundfos
See schedule for capacities
STORAGE TANK ST-1
Vertical steel storage tank with base ring or support legs, 125 psig, W.P., ASME label.
Provide top side connection and bottom side connection sized per drawings, openings to be flanged. Provide 1” bottom drain connection and 1” top connection.
Provide two additional openings located one top-side and one bottom-side (1- 1/2” in size). These openings shall be plugged for future use.
See schedule for dimensions and capacity
Acceptable Manufacturers: Cemline Wessels Adamson or approved equivalent
23 2000-19 AIR SEPARATOR AS-1 & 2
One piece cast iron or steel construction air separator without strainer manufactured in accordance with Section 8D of ASME code for 125 psig/350°F operating pressure and temperature. Provide tangential inlet and outlet connections, top vent connection and bottom blowdown connection.
a. AS-1 48 GPM with maximum 2.5 ft. pressure drop. 4" inlet and outlet connections
B & G Rolairtrol # RL-4 Taco # AC4 Thrush # 4”-AS-L Armstrong # VA-4 John Wood # JASR-19-504
b. AS-2 118 GPM with maximum 5.0 ft. pressure drop. 4 " inlet and outlet connections
B & G Rolairtrol # RL-4 Taco # AC-4 Thrush # 4”-AS-L Armstrong # VA-4 John Wood # JASR-19-504
AIR CONTROL AND EXPANSION TANK ASSEMBLY ET-1 & 2 (Diaphragm Tank)
Assembly shall consist of air separator, air vent, water feeder assembly, and pressurized diaphragm type expansion tank.
Air Vent: Cast iron body and cover, stainless steel bolts and stainless steel and brass control portion, 150 psi maximum working pressure and 250 oF maximum operating temperature; Thrush #720, B & G #107, Armstrong #750.
Water Feeder Assembly: 3/4" inch bronze body pressure reducing valve with integral strainer and built-in check valve, maximum working pressure of 75 psi and operating temperature of 200 0F. Adjustable range of 10-25 psig; B & G B7, Amtrol #11F, Taco #335, Armstrong RD40.
Expansion Tank: Welded steel, designed and constructed per ASME Section VIII with heavy duty butyl rubber diaphragm compatible with propylene and ethylene glycol and water mixtures. Maximum working pressure of 125 psi and operating temperature of 240 0F. Tank shall be provided with a ring base (vertical units), lifting rings, NPT system and drain connection. Provide an air charging valve (standard tire valve) to facilitate onsite pressure adjustments.
See schedule on drawings for capacities.
CHEMICAL POT FEEDER ASSEMBLY CF-1 and 2
Furnish and install pot feeder assembly where shown on drawings. Secure or
23 2000-20 attach pot feeder to wall or structure. Feeder shall have a two (2) gallon capacity and have a working pressure of at least 175 psi. Feeder shall be equipped with a 3-1/2 inch fill opening with quick opening cap and 3/4 inch inlet and outlet tappings. Provide 3/4 inch plug or ball valves on inlet and outlet tappings, 1/2 inch gate valve for drain, and 1/4 inch petcock.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Neptune VTF-2 J.L. Wingert, Model 2HD M.A. Fleckenstein, Model FA 700
GLYCOL FEEDER ASSEMBLY GF-1 and 2
System shall consist of a 50 gallon polyethylene tank with a hinged polyethylene tank cover, low level control, pressure switch, pump, tank stand, gallon level markings, adjustable pressure relief valve, suction and drain valves. Provide a hose bibb, for tank draining and a pump shut off valve. The tank shall be supported by a steel tank stand with foot pads. Pump shall be mounted on a steel platform under the tank. Provide a 0-100 psi system pressure gauge.
Low Level Control: The controller shall be a NEMA 3 enclosure mounted on the tank stand. The following face mounted components: Low liquid level alarm light, pump test switch, and a pump operating indicating light, an audible alarm, and alarm silencer switch.
Provide normally open dry contacts for remote alarm indication. The low level controller shall prevent pump operation when the liquid level is 3" or less (adjustable) in the tank. Low liquid level light shall operate under low liquid level condition.
Pressure Switch: Pressure switch to be corrosion resistant and rust proof construction, visible double break contacts which are silver-cadmium oxide, reinforced neoprene diaphragm, no-drift adjustable pressure setting, pilot duty NEMA-A600. Furnas Model 69WB3 or equivalent
Pump: Pump shall be positive displacement, all bronze construction, rotary gear pump with a 1/3 HP, 115/60/1 1725 rpm motor mounted integrally with pump. The pump shall be designed to produce 1.5 gpm at 100 psig. Oberdofer Model 991RMF01 or equivalent.
The glycol feeder discharge shall consist of a 3/4" check valve, union, pressure relief valve and a 3/4" threaded piping connection for connecting the glycol feeder to the system piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPEWORK A. Piping
23 2000-21 1. Grade and valve all water piping systems with 3/4" hose end valves to permit complete drainage of the system. All high points in equipment rooms shall be vented with automatic air vents piped to convenient drain. All high points in system outside of equipment rooms to be vented with combination automatic/manual air vents to relieve air in the system.
All branch lines and runouts shall be taken off of the top of mains and branch lines, wherever possible.
2. Valve off each individual piece of equipment with valve for shut off service on supply, valve for balancing and shut-off service on return. Provide isolation valves at each pipe branch take-off from the main. 3. Provide strainer ahead of each control valve. 4. Expansion Compensation: Furnish and install expansion loops where indicated or required in accordance with Section 23 0500. Pressure Testing: See Section 23 0500. 5. Cleaning: See Section 23 0500. 8. Provide Rectorseal Products as recommended by the manufacturer for glycol systems with threaded pipe.
B. Valves and Specialties. All services 1. Ball valves, plug valves or butterfly valves may be used on all water services for shut off service wherever the pressure and temperature ratings are satisfactory. Valves utilizing lever handles shall be installed to allow complete open to close valve operation. 2. Balancing valves shall be installed with a minimum of 5 pipe diameter in and 2 pipe diameters out of valve assemblies. Inlet shall be increased to 10 pipe diameters if installed downstream of pumps, tees or regulating valves. 3. Globe valves, where shown, are the only suitable valve. 4. Check valves on all base mounted pump discharges are to be "noiseless check valves", other check valves to be horizontal swing check valves. 5. Tee type strainers are not acceptable. Basket type strainers shall only be used where indicated. 6. Unions are to be used wherever necessary and in piping at all equipment so that piping may be conveniently broken and moved to facilitate equipment maintenance. 7. Dielectric unions are to be used at all connections where ferrous material is connected to non-ferrous material and where ferrous material is connected to domestic water piping. 8. Pressure Gauges and Press.-Temp. Taps are to be used wherever shown on drawings. Gauges and taps shall be installed in pipe immediately before and after equipment with no valve or fitting between gauge or tap and equipment. Taps shall be located in an accessible position. Snubbers shall be provided on all services where pulsating of gauge needle occurs. Install pressure gauges with isolation valve and drain valve between the gauge and the isolation valve. 9. Thermometers or Press.-Temp. Taps are to be used on each side of each pump and piece of equipment where a change in temperature takes place. Use thermal wells with heat transfer enhancement compound for
23 2000-22 thermometers. 10. Install automatic valves, thermals wells, pressure taps, water, drains, etc. as furnished by the Owner. 11. Air separator(s) shall be supported from floor with angle iron legs or hung from structure with threaded rods and angle iron clips welded to tank. Valve and pipe blowdown full size to floor drain. 12. Chemical pot feeder(s) shall be mounted with fill opening no higher than 4'-0" above finished floor. 13. Vibration Isolation, see Section 23 0500.
C. Valving of Branches Valve all lines except drain pan piping at the chase on each floor level.
D. Equipment Room Drains Grating of drains shall be notched as required by discharge piping at drain so that all water from drain lines enter the drains.
3.2 BOILER EMERGENCY POWER OFF
Boulder County shall provide emergency power off push button(s) to disconnect power to boiler burner controls to the Mechanical Contractor for installation. Regardless of the number of boilers, each push button shall stop all boilers. Push button shall be a maintained (push-pull) red mushroom type operator with clear-hinged cover. Mount switch at 5’-0” above finished floor so that it is not confused with other switches. Pushbutton(s) shall be labeled “EMERGENCY BOILER SHUTDOWN” and located just inside each boiler room door. Switch shall be wired into the boiler limit circuit and shall break the 120 V power at the boiler.
3.3 BOILERS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and in accordance with State and local codes. Install units(s) plumb and level. If more than one supply and/or return connection is required, follow manufacturer's minimum piping recommendations for piping connection at boiler.
B. Low water cut-off shall be externally mounted with quick opening blow down valve.
C. Run full size drain line from boiler relief valve to glycol feeder.
D. Capped or plugged tees or crosses shall be used in control piping in place of elbows to allow cleaning of pipes.
E. Gas vents on gas controls and regulators from boiler-burner unit shall be vented independently to the outdoors. Cross sectional area of all gas vents shall be maintained throughout their entire length. Vent terminations shall be designed to prevent entry of water or foreign objects."
F. The manufacturer or his representative shall provide supervision of installation, start-up, combustion test report and instruction of Owner's representative.
23 2000-23 Combustion test report shall be furnished to the testing and balancing contractor for inclusion into the testing and balancing report. Request and obtain inspection and written approval of the installation by the State Division of Labor prior to building occupancy.
G. The scheduled Boiler is drawn on plans. Other models may vary slightly in dimensions, input, flue size, gas line size, piping connections, etc. Changes to accommodate other models shall be made at no extra cost.
H. This is a one pass boiler; other models may vary in number of passes. Contractor is responsible for changes to accommodate other models at no extra cost.
3.4 RTU-1 AND MUA-3 INSTALLATION 1. Examination a. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. b. Verify that proper power supply is available.
2. Installation a. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Mount unit(s) on spring isolation roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork. Install roof mounting curb level. c. Pipe coil drain pan through a full size 4” deep “P” trap to roofdeck. Fill “P” trap with water prior to starting unit. d. Install coil piping arrangements indicated. Provide wiring of control valve as required for controls system.
3. Manufacturer’s Field Service a. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s).
4. The scheduled unit is shown on the drawings. Other units by other manufacturers may vary slightly in dimensions, coil placement, weight, etc. Changes to accommodate other manufacturers shall be made at no extra cost. 5. Install backflow preventer and fill and drain assembly on cold water feed line within the heated space to allow for seasonal shutdown of the evaporative cooler section. 6. Install pressure regulator valve on cold water feed line.
3.5 PUMPS
A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Install pumps to allow complete removal without dismantling connecting piping.
D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction and line sized silent
23 2000-24 check valve (installed minimum 5 pipe diameters downstream of pump discharge) and balancing valve on pump discharge. Decrease from line size using reducers. Provide pressure gauges, etc. as shown. Pipe strainer discharge through shut-off valve to floor drain.
E. Lubricate pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after completion of system installation and prior to start-up.
3.6 GLYCOL FEEDER ASSEMBLY
A. Clean and flush glycol system prior to adding glycol solution. RE: Section 23 0500.
B. Fill system and storage drum with a mixture of 50% propylene glycol/50% water solution by volume suitable for operating temperatures of 200 oF. Propylene glycol shall be industrial quality heat transfer fluid. Dowfrost or Intercool NFP.
C. Perform tests to determine the strength of glycol and water solution. Submit written test results and include in O & M manuals. Provide test prior to end of first year of operation and replenish as required.
D. Set pressure switch to start feed pump at 10 psi and stop feed pump at 15 psi.
E. Run full size discharge line from system relief valve to storage tank.
3.7 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER
A. Installation
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Align chiller package on concrete housekeeping pad. 3. Install unit(s) on vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 0500 for requirements. 4. Connect to electrical service(s). 5. Connect to chilled water piping. a. On inlet, provide: (1) Flexible equipment connector. (2) Shut-off valve. (3) Pressure/Temperature tap, prior to any fitting.
b. On outlet, provide: (1) Thermometer well for temperature sensor. (2) Flexible equipment connector. (3) Shut-offvalve. (4) Pressure/Temperature tap.
6. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit evaporator cleaning.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Services 1. Starting of Systems: Prepare and start systems. 2. Supply service of factory trained representative for a minimum period of
23 2000-25 two days to supervise testing, dehydration and charging of machine, start- up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.
3. Manufacturer’s authorized service representative shall be responsible for and perform first year’s labor warranty. 3. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil. 4. Provide start-up log which shall be submitted with O and M manual.
C. Demonstration and Instructions 1. Demonstrate system operation and verify specified performance.
END OF SECTION
23 2000-26 SECTION 23 3000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED (BUT NOT LIMITED TO) A. Ductwork B. Flexible Ducts C. Dampers, Turning Devices and Ductwork Accessories D. Duct Liner E. VAV Control Units F. Exhaust Fans G. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers H. Variable Frequency Drives I. Wiring
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Requirements." B. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." C. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." E. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General See Section 23 0000 for other acceptable manufacturers, substitutions and approvals.
B. Ductwork 1. Sheet metal duct systems to be ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock forming quality, having G-90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90. Contractor shall furnish certification form from mill or supplier as to coating thickness upon request. Gauges of ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual or International Mechanical Code, whichever is more stringent. 2. Aluminum ducts to be ASTM B209, aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum connectors and bar stock to be Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. 3. Spiral Seam Ducts. Round and oval spiral seam galvanized steel ducts and fittings shall meet requirements of Paragraph 2.1.A. United McGill Corp., Hercules Industries, Metco Inc., Sheet Metal Products Company, Semco, Superior, Spir-L-ok (ductwork only) or Spiral Pipe of Texas. Minimum galvanized gauges listed.
23 3000-1
Diameter Minimum Galvanized Gauge (to meet UMC 97 Table 6-B) 3” thru 14" 26 ga. 15” thru 23” 24 ga. 23” thru 36" 22 ga.
4. Flexible Ductwork a. General UL-181 listed, Class I factory pre-insulated duct with solid inner liner formed by a reinforced aluminum laminate or other reinforced material mechanically bonded or locked together with a corrosive resistant galvanized or coated steel helix and covered with a minimum 1-1/2" thick fiberglass blanket sheathed in a polyethylene vapor barrier. Insulation to have a 0.23 "C" factor maximum, shall meet FHA/HUD requirements and have a vapor barrier permeability of 0.10 perms (ASTM E96-Procedure A). Duct shall comply with the latest NFPA 90A and 90B Standards. Pressure ratings based on test with temperature and velocity applied. Flame spread less than 25/smoke development less than 50. Duct must be approved by code authority for specific application. Maximum installed length not to exceed 6’-0”. b. Low Pressure Duct (all sizes) shall have a positive working pressure rating of not less than 6" w.g., and a negative working pressure rating of not less than 0.5" w.g. Pressure ratings shall be at a maximum operating temperature of 180 oF.
Flexmaster Type 5, Wiremold WC, Genflex SFR-25A, Omniaire 1100, Hercules IFM, ATCO UPC #30, Thermaflex G-KM.
c. High Pressure Duct (all sizes) shall have a positive working pressure rating of not less than 12" w.g., and a negative working pressure rating of not less than -1" w.g. Pressure ratings shall be at a maximum operating temperature of 180 oF.
Flexmaster Type 3, Thermaflex MKC, Genflex IGE. 5. Duct Sealant. Non-hardening, water resistant, non-combustible, liquid or mastic or with tape as recommended by manufacturer. All sealants shall have approved fire rating for plenum application as required by code authority.
C. Duct Pressure Classes (SMACNA)
1. Unless indicated on drawings or elsewhere in this specification, the following shall be used to determine duct construction pressure class: a Variable Air Volume (VAV) systems; upstream of terminal control units to the fan outlet, ductwork pressure class shall be not less than the blocked off static pressure of 6“ when the fan is at its
23 3000-2 minimum cfm setting. Downstream of terminal control units, pressure class shall be 1” w.g. b. Return Air Ductwork; -1/2" w.g. pressure class. Relief Air Ductwork; +1/2" w.g. pressure class c. Exhaust systems; from the exhaust grille or register to the exhaust fan inlet, ductwork pressure class shall be at least 100% of the total static pressure specified for the fan. Ductwork downstream of exhaust fans shall be 3" w.g. pressure class.
D. Duct Accessories 1. Round Duct Take-off Fittings. a. Spin-in Fitting Factory fabricated 26 gauge (all diameters) G-90 galvanized sheet metal for insulated ducts. Butterfly damper with quadrant operator and lock nut on all applications. b. Lateral Take-off Fitting Factory fabricated 26 gauge G-90 galvanized sheet metal fittings with 45 degree angle take-off, adhesive coated gasket, 1" mounting flange and butterfly damper with quadrant operator and lock nut on all applications.
2. Flexible Connections. 24 oz. per yard, fire-retardant neoprene coated, U.L. approved material. Flame spread: 25 maximum and Smoke development: 50 maximum, maximum length = 10". 3. Turning Vanes. Non-adjustable 90 o turning vanes, 22 gauge galvanized steel runners, per SMACNA Standards with: a. Double Wall Vanes 2” radius and smaller to be 26 galvanized steel minimum Radius above 2" to be 24 gauge galvanized steel minimum. b. Single Wall Vanes 2” radius and smaller to be 24 gauge galvanized steel minimum. Radius above 2" to be 22 gauge galvanized steel minimum.
4. Volume Dampers. a. Rectangular and Square 22 gauge galvanized steel blades and frame up to 18" width and 12" height; above to be 16 gauge galvanized steel frames with 16 gauge galvanized steel opposed blades. Blades to be brake formed at edges for stiffeners. Galvanized steel shaft (1/2" diameter minimum on dampers wider than 36", 3/8" diameter on dampers less than 36" width, 3/8" minimum control arms) with molded synthetic plastic or oil impregnated sintered bronze bushings. No blade end seals. Maximum blade width of 8 inches. Ruskin MD15 or MD35 or equivalent. b. Round and Oval Dampers to have blade stops and be fitted with locking type hand quadrant control solid steel rod (1/4" diameter minimum) welded to blade, and molded synthetic plastic, stainless steel or oil
23 3000-3 impregnated sintered bronze sleeve shaft bearings.
Damper blades and collars to be galvanized steel sheet of the following minimum gauges.
Diameter Collar Blade 3” thru 20" 20 20 20” thru 40" 14 10
Manufacturer 3” thru 20” 20” thru 40” Ruskin MDRS25 CDR25 AES WM-VCD HDR-50 Louvers & Dampers RBD -- or equivalent.
5. Volume Extractors. Steel or aluminum construction w/vanes on 2" centers, gang operated. Manual operator attached to branch duct or in the case of sidewall registers operation through face of register.
Carnes 1250, Titus AG-225, T & B VLR, Anemostat DT2M, Krueger EX-88A, Agitair Branchtrol S-2, J & J EX 9, Metal-Aire 102, Millaire EX-1, Metal Aire 102-1 or equivalent.
6. Access Doors (in ductwork) Doors shall be constructed of same gauge as ductwork being installed in, 24 gauge (minimum), galvanized sheet metal provided with 22 gauge minimum flat iron or angle iron stiffening frame and so constructed that they can be operated without twisting or distortion. Provide duct opening at each door with a continuous reinforcing galvanized bar or angle against which the door will close, 1/8" neoprene gasket. Doors shall be provided with no less than two galvanized iron hinges and sash-lock latches sized to suit door size with each hinge having a bronze pin. Doors shall be double skin with 1" insulation between sheet metal where ducts are insulated.
Pre-manufactured access doors can be used provided they are submitted for review per Section 15010 prior to project bidding.
7. Duct Liner (inside the duct – downstream of VAV box only). One inch thick, resin bonded glass fiber, black coating on air stream surface, rated by manufacturer for at least 4000 FPM and meeting the requirements of ASTM C1071 Type I. Fire resistance shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Fuel contribution and smoke development not to exceed 50. Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of not less than 0.60 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 using an "A" mounting or a minimum of 0.70 using an "F" mounting. K value not more than 0.26 Btuh per square foot per °F at 75 °F or an "R" value of 4. Maximum absolute roughness factor per foot of .004 ft. a. Manville "Linacoustic" b. Certainteed "Toughgard"
23 3000-4 c. Owens Corning "Aeroflex" d. Knuaf e. or prior approved equivalent
F. Filter Gauges (Provide on RTU-1 and MUA-3) Differential pressure gauges, Dwyer Series 2000 ASF magnehelic or equivalent with scale range approximately twice the pressure drop recommended for filter change and adjustable signal flag.
G. Wiring 1. All wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code (latest edition), local codes and the Electrical Division of these specifications. 2. All Control interlocks and control panels shall be wired under Division 15, except control wiring done at factory or specifically shown to be by Division 16, and 120V power circuits to each control panel or junction box shown on the plans and schedules. Power circuits shall be provided under Division 16.
H. Smoke Detectors 1. Smoke detectors to be provided under Electric Division.
I. Equipment Schedule
VAV CONTROL UNIT WITH REHEAT VAV-# (See schedule for numbering scheme) (Shut-Off Type) Shut-off type variable air volume control unit. Open end, 24 gauge minimum galvanized steel factory furnished casing. Casing interior acoustically and thermally lined with UL listed glass fiber insulation meeting NFPA 90A requirements and the sound requirements of this specification. Seal all exposed insulation edges. Damper to seal 100% shut-off. No more than 2% leakage through damper at 0.5" S.P. Unit must operate with combined static pressure drop across the unit and coil as low as .55".
One row water copper coil with aluminum fins. Seamless copper tube, expanded into fin collar for permanent bond. Female sweat connections. Provide upstream access door for inspection of heating coil.
Electronic, pressure independent control with maximum and minimum settings, field adjustable. VAV boxes shall be provided with multi-point flow sensor (station) and differential pressure sensor. Owner to provide room temperature sensor and coil control valve to Contractor for field installation.
Controls shall be provided by the Owner. By agreement, unit mounted components may be furnished to the factory for installation under the Owner’s supervision.
Maximum allowable sound power levels for open end boxes at inlet size and cfm noted with 1.0" combined static pressure drop at sea level across the unit and coil. Sound rating to be in accordance with ARI Standard 880, and manufacturer to be certified to ARI as complying with ARI Standard 880.
23 3000-5
Maximum Allowable Sound Power Level - NC-30
Radiated - dB Octave Bands CFM 2 3 4 5 6 7 200 61 54 43 40 39 42 400 72 66 56 55 55 58 600 72 66 57 56 56 59 800 73 67 58 57 57 60 1200 74 68 59 58 58 60 1600 75 69 59 58 58 61 2000 75 69 60 59 59 62
Discharge - dB Octave Bands CFM 2 3 4 5 6 7 200 69 67 63 70 70 59 400 73 71 67 75 75 63 600 74 72 68 76 76 64 800 77 75 70 76 76 66 1200 78 77 73 80 79 71 1600 81 80 76 82 82 74 2000 82 80 76 82 79 72
CONTROL UNIT CFM RANGES* MANUFACTURER 5" Inlet 6" Inlet 7" Inlet 8" Inlet 10" Inlet 12" Inlet Trane 0-200 201-400 ------401-800 801-1200 1201-1600 Size 03 06 ------11 17 24 Titus 0-200 201-400 401-600 601-750 751-1200 1201-1600 Size 5 6 7 8 10 12 Carnes 0-200 201-400 401-600 601-750 801-1000 1051-1600 Size 05 06 07 08 10 12 Enviro-Tec 0-150 151-400 ------401-800 801-1200 1201-1600 Size 5 6 ------8 10 12 Krueger 0-200 201-400 401-600 601-750 751-1200 1201-1600 Size 5 6 8 10 12 Carrier 0-200 201-400 401-600 601-750 751-1200 1201-1600 Size 5 6 7 8 10 12
*Listed cfm is maximum cfm that can be used for size listed. Inlet size is round or oval.
See schedule for capacities.
23 3000-6 Titus ECV Enviro Tec SDR-EH Trane VCEE Krueger LMHS Carrier 35D Carnes AVED
EXHAUST FAN EF- 1 (Small In -Line)
In-line centrifugal fan with B.I. aluminum wheel and hub dynamically and statically balanced. Galvanized steel, straight sided housing with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. Spun inlet venturi. Removable access panels. V-belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Belt protection tube motor out of air stream. Motor and belt enclosure. Motor and fan mounted on vibration isolators. Flexible connection on inlet and discharge.
Refer to Section 23 0500 for additional motor, phase protection and starter requirements.
Sone level measured in accordance with AMCA Standards. Provide backdraft damper.
See schedule for capacities.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck Model BSQ Jenn Air ILG Acme Penn Carnes Cook
EXHAUST FAN EF-2 (Dome Type - Wall or Roof)
Aluminum, water tight, removable housing with galvanized steel or aluminum bird screen and aluminum blade, self acting, sound dampened, backdraft damper. Backwards inclined centrifugal type fan wheel statically and dynamically balanced. Vee-belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor and fan mounted on vibration isolators. Motor and starter as detailed in schedule. Refer to Section 15050 for additional motor, phase protection and starter requirements. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, ball or roller type and selected for Basic Rating Life (L 10 ) of 80,000 hours at maximum speed and horsepower per ABMA Std 9 or 11. Sone level in accordance with AMCA Standards. Furnish Factory fabricated curb to General Contractor for installation.
See schedule for capacities.
ROOF MOUNT: Belt Drive Greenheck GB or equivalent by Cook ACE-B
23 3000-7 Jenn Air BCR Acme Model PV Penn Domex Carnes VEBK Ammerman BRX ILG CRB Breidert CX
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be performance tested and rated in accordance with ADC 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
All louvered face supply diffusers to have round neck. Provide square to round adaptor for louver face diffusers where required. All perforated face and louver face diffusers, registers and grilles to have off white baked enamel finish and removable face or core. When these diffusers, registers or grilles are used in grid ceilings, frame to be suitable for type ceiling in which they are installed. For concealed grid systems, face size shall match size of tile. For exposed grid systems, face size shall fit into grid. On perforated face diffusers, registers or grilles, where face size is smaller than ceiling grid (i.e. 12" x 12" face in 24" x 48" grid) an insulated panel 12" x 24" or 24" x 24" shall be furnished with diffuser shell size as required for air volume. In all other ceilings frame shall be flanged type.
All register and grille numbers are for steel construction unless the manufacturer makes only aluminum. Aluminum registers and grilles are acceptable, providing they come with a finish suitable for painting. Steel registers and grilles to have prime coat finish. Sidewall exhaust and return grilles and registers to have blades fixed at approximately 35 to 45 degrees.
All diffusers and registers shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers unless supplied from an accessible twist-in fitting with damper.
When grilles, registers or diffusers are used in conjunction with radiation dampers, they must be fabricated from minimum 24 gauge steel. Aluminum is not acceptable.
All ceiling diffusers to be 4-way throw unless noted otherwise on plans.
Reference schedule
STATIONARY LOUVER SL-1
18 gauge minimum galvanized steel 4" blades on 4" centers at 45 o with return bends . Set in 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame. Secured and caulked into opening. Provide extended sill of dimension field verified at the job site. Removable galvanized steel 1/4 inch 19 gauge wire mesh behind louver. Performance in accordance with AMCA Publication 511. Provide primer coat finish for blades and frame.
23 3000-8 See schedule for capacities.
Ruskin L811 American Warming LF-47 Arrow FS-400 Cesco SLS4 Dowco LFC-4 Greenheck FSJ-402 Louvers & Dampers Company FL-41-C Leader Industries F-445-S
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (furnished and installed by Boulder County.)
A certified factory start-up is provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form will be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the Contractor for inclusion into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Toshiba Graham or Mitsubishi
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER EUH-1 Horizontal
U.L. listed and approved assembly. Horizontal Model provided with individually adjustable horizontal louvers. Metal sheathed fin tube heating element. 18 gauge cabinet with baked enamel finish. Direct drive propeller fan with safety fan guard. Motor shall be totally enclosed, sleeve or ball bearing and shall have built in overloads. Automatic reset thermal overload protection; all heaters drawing more than 48 amps to have built in branch circuit fusing. Provide built in thermostat and summer fan switch on horizontal units.
See schedule for capacities
Acceptable Manufacturers: Qmark Model MUH Erincraft Series HD Markel Series 5100 Redd-i Series UH
BOILER FLUE F-1, 2 and 3
Provide a flue that shall comply with all requirements of appliance listing. The closure system shall be tested to be gas tight at two and one-half times the listed pressure rating of 3" water column (pressure: positive up to 3" water column, negative, or neutral). The flue-gas conduit shall be made from AL 29-4C, for use in condensing environments.
23 3000-9 The system shall be fastened with ring-and-tab tapered closure system and sealed with factory-supplied sealant. Contained entirely on the outside of the flue-gas conduit, the ring-and-tab prevents penetration of the flue-gas conduit by any lower alloy, non-approved fasteners, such as pop rivets or screws. Tee ring- and-tab tapered closure system shall be tested to be gas tight at two and one- half times the listed pressure rating of 3" water column. All seams shall be welded from a process specifically for use with AL 29-4C stainless steel that ensures a complete welded seam, with no minute cracks or crevices to fail or collect corrosive condensation.
COMBUSTION AIR DUCT , paired with F-1, 2 and 3
Single wall aluminum, 316L stainless steel or PVC pipe that originates at equipment. Counter flash through wall and terminate per detail. Install as required by equipment manufacturer. Materials listed are for scheduled boiler. Installed materials shall be as approved by the installed boiler manufacturer.
SOLAR HEATING COLLECTORS; METAL WALL PANELS: SHC-1
Provide an integrated outside air preheating solar panel system. Scaled engineering drawings shall be provided of the complete installation and submitted to the Architect for review prior to construction of the system. As a minimum, provide plan and elevation views, details which fully describe how the panel system is attached to the structure, wind loading calculations with anchorage requirements as well as duct connection details.
The panels shall be constructed of galvanized steel, 24 gauge, ASTM A653 and A775 Configuration shall be in a 1 1/4 inch ribs with 35.44 inch coverage.
Finish shall be black silicon modified polyester (SMP) with inorganic and ceramic pigmentation.
Physical dimensions are indicated on the drawings, see schedule of connected equipment for required airflow rates.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Conserval Systems Inc. in USA; Conserval Engineering Inc. in Canada (Contact: 4242 Ridge Lea Road, Suite 28, Buffalo, NY 14226; Telephone: (716) 835-4903; Fax: (716) 835-4904; E-mail: [email protected] ; website: www.solarwall.com .)
RELIEF HOOD RH-1
Galvanized steel with prime coat finish color selection by Architect or aluminum relief hood with removable or hinged hood. Outlet area to have 1/2" 19 ga. wire mesh bird screen. Installation to be on flat roof. Hoof size to be as shown in manufacturer's catalog for listed throat size.
Relief hood to include the following accessories: backdraft damper with linked blades with extruded vinyl or felt strip blade stops and adjustable damper with
23 3000-10 linked blades with extruded vinyl or felt strip blade stops and adjustable counter weight, insect or snow screen, prefab roof curb.
See schedule on drawings for capacities.
Cook type GR Penn Airette Ventilator Outlet Hood Greenheck Air Cap Relief Hood Model FRH Carnes Relief Vent Model GE Louvers and Dampers Exhaust Hood AGV-200 ILG Relief Vent M-RVE Exit Aire Relief Ventilator Type RS Acme Model TEV Cesco GVS-E Western Vents Series AV-100
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUCTWORK A. General 1. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are sheet metal duct dimensions. As a minimum ductwork shall be furnished, constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual, also comply with more rigid requirements specified herein. \ 2. All exposed ductwork shall be Paintloc for painting by Division 09.
B. Duct Sealing 1. All ducts shall be sealed per SMACNA Standards, Class A sealing requirements. 2. Static pressure construction class over 2" w.g. Seal all seams, joints, connections and ductwork penetrations by welding or with duct sealant to provide an air tight system.
C. Ductwork Testing 1. See Section 23 0500 for testing of ductwork. 2. Ductwork required to be pressure tested shall be tested to its pressure class.
D. Ductwork Application 1. All ductwork to be galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-71 except as otherwise called for.
2. All round and oval ducts exposed to view shall be spiral seam. Concealed round and oval ducts may be fabricated with lock type or welded longitudinal seams. All elbows to be pressed steel elbows or five piece welded elbows.
E. Takeoffs Do not install takeoffs on elbows or other points of the system where air velocity is not uniform.
23 3000-11
F. Ductwork Hangers, Connections and Construction 1. Suspend ducts from structure with proper hangers at a maximum of 8'-0" intervals, at each floor, change of direction and wherever necessary. 2. Make all duct connections to motor driven equipment with flexible connections, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 3. Make all radius elbows with radius of one and one half times the diameter or width of duct and an inside throat radius of one times the diameter or width. Radius elbows is the preferred method for 90 o duct turns. Where space limitation will not permit radius elbows, provide 90 o square elbows with turning vanes. All 90 o square elbows are to have turning vanes except where specifically noted otherwise on plans. 4. Install opposed blade dampers in all low velocity duct divisions and splits where shown or required to allow system balance. Install opposed blade dampers in all 45 ° takeoffs unless specifically noted on the drawing. 5. All diffusers to be equipped with opposed blade dampers unless supplied from a spin-in fitting with damper. All registers to be equipped with opposed blade dampers. Where noted as grille on plans, opposed blade dampers not required. (Damper to be adjustable through face of diffuser or register.) 6. Spin-in fitting final locations shall be determined after location of lighting and other possible obstructions within the ceiling space are known so that sharp bends and excessive lengths of flexible duct are minimized. 7. Provide adjustable volume extractors at all rectangular take offs to sidewall registers and wherever indicated on plans. 8. Provide 45 o takeoffs with opposed blade dampers at all rectangular duct takeoffs except as indicated on drawings. 9. Make all duct offsets with 15 degree transitions. Sharper transitions can be made only when space does not allow 15 degree offsets, 30 degree offsets maximum. 10. Install all automatic control dampers, blank off plates or transitions as furnished by the Owner. Provide required access doors for service to control equipment. Install smoke detectors, provided by Division 26 where indicated. 11. All connections between ducts, hangers, hanger rods and appurtances of dissimilar metals shall be made with dielectric separation.
G. Access Doors Provide sheet metal access doors; 18" x 16" hand access, 24" x 42" minimum personnel access where size of duct permits, as noted or as required for proper access to the equipment. Access doors shall occur on each side of each coil and filter bank, inlet to each fan, at all fire dampers, at all automatic control dampers and wherever else shown. Access doors shall open against air pressure, wherever practical. Openings in ductwork for access doors shall have folded edges, if exposed, for protection.
3.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Insulate all supply and return ducts, and outside air ducts and wherever else called for on the plans. Exhaust ducts do not require insulation unless specifically called for. Supply and/or return ductwork located within the conditioned spaces served
23 3000-12 by this ductwork, do not require insulation. Ductwork passing through a space that is not supplied air by this ductwork requires insulation. Ceiling plenums and mechanical rooms are not conditioned spaces and duct insulation is required.
B. Rectangular and square supply ductwork downstream of VAV boxes shall be lined on the inside of the ductwork using duct liner.
1. The liner shall be applied to the inside of the duct (with the spray face to the air stream) with non-flammable, sprayable, duct liner adhesive complying with ASTM C916 and with 90% (min) adhesive coverage coating the clean sheet metal. Liner shall be installed per NAIMA “Duct Liner Installation Standard”. The liner shall further be fastened with stud weld or impact-driven type pins and clips which shall compress the liner to hold it firmly in place. Maximum spacing of mechanical fasteners shall be as follows:
Velocity (fpm) 0-2500 2501-400 From transverse end of liner 3” 3” Across width of duct 12” O.C. 6” O.C. From corners of duct 4” 4” Along length of duct 18” O.C. 16” O.C.
The upstream transverse edges and clips shall be sealed with vapor barrier adhesive.
2. All corner joints in the liner shall be lapped tightly butted or folded. 3. Leading edges of liner at fan discharge, where lined duct is proceeded by unlined duct, and where air velocities exceed 4000 fpm shall be provided with galvanized sheet metal nosing.
C. Round supply, round return shall be wrapped with insulation on the outside unless otherwise noted. Round duct exposed below ceilings in occupied areas shall not be insulated. See Section 23 0700, Insulation.
D. Ductwork exposed to weather shall be lined with 2" thick insulation with vapor barrier. Seal duct joints weathertight.
3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Attach all flexible ducts inner liner to duct connectors, diffuser necks, or ductwork with stainless steel worm driven clamp. Tape outer vapor barrier securely over clamp with vapor barrier tape.
B. Low pressure flexible duct to be used only in systems with a maximum of 2" static pressure available.
C. Maximum length of any section of flexible duct to be six feet. Provide rigid round duct on takeoffs as required maintaining maximum length.
3.4 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (GRD) A. Install all GRD’s to ductwork with airtight connections.
23 3000-13
B. Paint ductwork visible behind GRD’s matte black.
C. Install all GRD’s in general location indicated on the drawings. Coordinate exact location with Architectural reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install and support all GRD’s per manufacturer’s recommendations and per IBC Standards.
1. GRD’s weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners. 2. GRD’s weighing greater than 20 pounds, but not more than 56 pounds, in addition to the above, shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slack. 3. GRD’s weighing greater than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers.
E. Forward GRD A k factors to Test and Balance Contractor.
3.5 FILTER GAUGES Provide and install differential pressure air filter gauges of suitable range with sensing tips located on the inlet and outlet side of all supply fan filters. Set adjustable signal flag at point on gauge where filters should be changed.
3.6 AIR FILTERS A. Provide extra set of air filters for all air handling units.
B. Specified filters along with extra sets should not be used during construction. Contractor should provide temporary filters as required to protect system from construction dust, dirt and debris.
3.8 WIRING OF CONTROL DEVICES BY OTHERS A. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on the drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price.
3.9 WIRING A. Installation of wiring, cable, conduit, etc. shall conform to Division 26. In case of conflict between this Division and Division 26, the most stringent requirements shall be met.
B. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, parallel to building lines and suspended neatly from the overhead structure (do not lay wiring on top of ceiling tiles).
C. All wiring shall be run in metallic conduit (flexible conduit shall be limited to 3 foot lengths maximum), tubing or raceways.
23 3000-14
Exceptions: 1. NEC Class 2 low voltage wiring where not exposed to view such as above suspended ceilings, in shafts, etc., may be run in cable tested in accordance with test methods of NPFA 262 for installation in environmental air plenums or standard cable when not exposed in environmental air plenums.
3.10 LOW VOLTAGE POWER AND WIRING A. All control devices and panels containing low voltage power sources shall inherently comply with NEC Class 2 requirements (current limiting), or shall be supplied with branch circuit fusing to limit control circuit current to NEC Class 2. All control transformers shall be of the inherent current limiting type, or shall be installed with primary disconnect and overload protection.
B. All low voltage conductors shall be 18 AWG minimum except for long runs where wire should be up sized as recommended by manufacturer.
3.11 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Location of smoke detectors shall be as shown on drawings, provided by Division 26, installed by Division 23.
B. Wiring of detectors to fire alarm panel by Division 26. Control wiring of detectors (i.e. fan shut down, etc.) by this Division.
C. Wire smoke detectors to protect the unit in both hand and automatic operation.
D. On signal from smoke detector, supply fan shall be shut off.
3.12 SOLAR HEATING COLLECTORS; METAL WALL PANELS
A. System shall be installed in accordance to manufacturers written installation instructions and project engineered drawings.
B. Ensure that required spacing between building structure and solar panels is maintained.
3.13 VAV CONTROL UNITS
A. Duct connection to inlet of boxes to be same size as inlet unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
B. Transition box discharge to duct size shown on the drawings.
C. Provide a minimum of 4 box inlet diameters or 30: of straight duct upstream of box inlet connection whichever is greater.
D. VAV Box actuators shall be readily accessible with at least 30 inches of working clearance or on the job approval to reduce.
23 3000-15
E. All terminal hot water coils shall have access to both sides for future cleaning – typically in the form of two access doors.
END OF SECTION
23 3000-16